JP7305496B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-200000 describes batch backup processing for collectively backing up first information when a periodically occurring backup condition is met, and second information when a periodically occurring backup condition is met. A gaming machine is disclosed that performs a split backup process for splitting and backing up information.

JP 2017-23552 A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, for example, the possibility of a power failure or the like occurring during backup processing is not taken into consideration, and there is a risk that a suitable backup processing cannot be performed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of executing a suitable backup process.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means for controlling display of a moving image using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area;
a control means;
and a storage means capable of storing backup data,
The control means is
capable of executing a first backup process of storing first backup data in the storage means based on the establishment of a first backup condition;
Based on the establishment of a second backup condition, a second backup process having a shorter execution time than the first backup process for storing the second backup data in the storage means can be executed with a priority different from that of the first backup process. and
It is possible to determine the mode of power-on,
the first backup condition is satisfied and the second backup condition is not satisfied in response to the power-on of the first mode,
the first backup condition and the second backup condition are satisfied in response to the power-on of the second aspect;
the data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component and a second component;
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image ,
Information indicated by the second backup data stored in the storage means is easier to confirm than information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means.
It is characterized by
In addition, (1) other gaming machines,
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.),
Control means (for example, production control microcomputer 120, etc.),
Storage means capable of storing backup data (for example, backup memory board 14, etc.),
The control means is
A first backup process (for example, transferring the manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14) for storing the first backup data (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the first backup condition. processing of transfers, etc.), and
A second backup process (for example, a backup memory) having a shorter execution time than the first backup process for storing second backup data (for example, store confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the second backup condition. processing of transferring store confirmation data to the board 14, etc.) can be executed in an order of priority different from that of the first backup processing (for example, the backup of store confirmation data is higher than the backup of manufacturer confirmation data). short execution time and high processing priority, etc.),
moreover,
Effect executing means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, etc.) for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11, etc.) for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13, etc.) for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) for controlling display of moving images using the data in the first storage area;
A character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) that controls the display of character images using the data in the second storage area,
The data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, a display style set by text display setting information). containing data about a plurality of character image components;
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image (see FIG. 33-7, for example).

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed. Appropriate display control is also possible.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means is not reported on the gaming machine (for example, log information indicated by manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1),
The information indicated by the second backup data stored by the storage means can be notified on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the store confirmation data is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Based on the second backup data stored in the storage means, information indicated by the second backup data (for example, log information indicated by the store confirmation data) can be displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5, etc.) Display control means (for example, production control microcomputer 120 etc.)
The information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data) is not displayed on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on pachinko machine 1, etc.),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The storage means
a first storage area in which the first backup data is written and the second backup data is not written (for example, the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003, etc.);
A second storage area (for example, a second backup storage unit 95AK004, etc.) in which the second backup data is written and the first backup data is not written,
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The first storage area has a first number (eg, three) of storage areas (eg, 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003, etc.) in which the same first backup data is written. has
The second storage area has a second number (e.g., one) of storage areas (e.g., second backup storage unit 95AK004, etc.) that is smaller than the first number in which the same second backup data is written.
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
a first control means (for example, the main substrate 11, etc.);
A second control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 120, etc.), which is the control means,
The second control means executes the first backup process and the second backup process when only the second control means of the first control means and the second control means is reset. No (for example, in step 95AKS112, the data for manufacturer confirmation is backed up, but the store confirmation data is not backed up, etc.);
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above,
The second control means executes the first backup process and the second backup process when both the first control means and the second control means are reset (for example, steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107). ),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above,
When the voltage supplied to the second control means is below a predetermined value, a signal supply means (for example, power disconnection detection circuit 95AK010, etc.),
The second control means determines whether both the first control means and the second control means are reset based on whether or not the predetermined signal is supplied after the power is turned on. It is possible to identify whether only has been reset (for example, processing after 95AKS104),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to gaming machines of the following (9) to (16). Conventionally, in gaming machines, there has been a technology that allows character information of characters' lines to be displayed in different modes during execution of a super reach effect, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77592. In such a game machine, when displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, the control load for displaying the moving image increases, or the recognition of the character image becomes difficult. In view of this point, there is a demand for providing a gaming machine that enables appropriate display control.

The game machine of (9) is
A gaming machine capable of executing a game (e.g. pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, etc.) for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added. Effect execution means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.), a first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11, etc.) for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area (for example, storage area) for storing data related to character images 91AKM13, etc.), moving image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) for controlling the display of moving images using the data in the first storage area, and the data in the second storage area. Character image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) for controlling the display of character images is provided, and the data in the second storage area is designated by the first component (for example, text image designation information). a text image, etc.) and a second component (for example, a display style set by the text display setting information), wherein the character image control means controls one moving image to The first component and the second component can be changed during the display period of the added character image (see, eg, FIG. 33-7).
Such a configuration enables appropriate display control.

(10) In the gaming machine of (9) above, when the character image control means displays a character image corresponding to a common first component during the display period, the second component related to the character image is displayed. It may be changeable (see, eg, FIG. 33-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(11) In the game machine of (9) or (10) above, the character image control means uses information (for example, field data constituting a color field) common to the specific image different from the character image to control the character image. The second component of the character image may be changeable (see, eg, FIG. 33-6).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (11) above, the character image control means controls a specific character image corresponding to a specific first element group (for example, a text image indicating "Geki Atsushi"). ) can be displayed, and the second component related to the specific character image can be changed at a plurality of timings (see FIG. 33-8, for example).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (12) above, the character image control means can individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. (see, eg, FIG. 33-4).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(14) In any one of (9) to (13) above, the data in the second storage area may include outline data (such as outline font data) that can be used to display character images.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(15) Glossy characters when a specific element is set as a character image constituent element in any one of the above (9) to (14) (for example, when the color field is "gold") In addition to displaying the image, it may be possible to add an effect image around the character image and display it (see, for example, FIG. 33-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(16) In any one of the gaming machines (9) to (15) above, when a special element is set as a character image component (for example, when the color field is "rainbow"), a predetermined range (for example, character It is possible to display character images in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, reddish purple, etc.) according to the internal coordinates, display time range, etc.). may
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various circuits and the like mounted on the effect control board. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing a configuration example of a backup memory board; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control main processing, and processing priority. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of CPU exception event occurrence processing and an example of VDP error interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing for production control. It is a figure which shows the example of the content of the production|presentation control command for games. It is a figure which shows the example of the content of the production|presentation control command used as a test command. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of the reception order of test commands and the processing to be executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of a backup control table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of displaying a maintenance history screen; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of displaying a maintenance history screen; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 41AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 42AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 42AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 43AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 44AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 45AK; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a backup storage section in a characteristic section 95AK, and manufacturer confirmation data and store confirmation data as backup data; FIG. 10 is a flowchart of backup processing in the characterizing portion 95AK; FIG. It is a block diagram of the production|presentation control microcomputer in characteristic part 95AK, and a power failure detection circuit. It is a timing chart showing a state when the pachinko game machine is reset. It is a timing chart showing a state when the effect control microcomputer is reset. It is a flowchart at the time of power-on of the production|presentation control microcomputer in the characteristic part 95AK. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing power failure date and time recording processing in a modified example of the characterizing portion 95AK; FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining recording timing of log information of a power failure date and time in a modified example of the characteristic portion 95AK; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of operation effect determination processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the presence or absence of an operation effect and the number of times for the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determining the number of setting suggestions related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the number of times of value notification related to the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various production|presentation based on characteristic part 60AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control board which concerns on characteristic part 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a text display process table related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the example of text display control based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK;

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1 according to this embodiment. A pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2 and a game machine frame 3. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an outer frame that rotatably supports the game machine frame 3 and the like. The game board 2 is a gauge board forming a game board surface. The game machine frame 3 is a frame for fixing the game board 2 . A game area surrounded by guide rails and the like is formed on the game board 2 . A game ball (game medium) shot from the shooting device passes through the shooting path and is hit into the game area. The game machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame having a glass window.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, there are a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, an image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, A normal pattern display 20, a first reservation display 25A, a second reservation display 25B, a normal pattern reservation display 25C, a passage gate 41, and the like are provided. In addition, the game board surface in the game area may be provided with a windmill, a large number of obstacle nails, a general prize winning opening, an out opening, and the like. A game effect lamp 9 is provided on the periphery of the game area. Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at left and right upper positions of the frame 3 for a game machine.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 . The hitting ball operation handle is operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area, and the resilience of the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation). At predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there are an upper tray (ball supply tray) for holding (storing) game balls and a lower tray (surplus) for holding (storing) surplus balls from the upper tray. ball storage dish) is provided. A stick controller 31A is attached to the member forming the lower plate, and a push button 31B is provided to the member forming the upper plate.

On the screens of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the image display device 5, etc., special symbols and decorative symbols are variably displayed. These variable displays are based on the occurrence of the first starting winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning hole formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, or to the normal variable winning ball device 6B It can be executed based on the generation of the second start winning prize by the game ball passing (entering) the formed second start winning hole. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are respectively configured using, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special design (special design), which is information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variably displayed). The image display device 5 is configured using, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of special symbols (first special symbol or first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A in the special symbol game and special symbols (first special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B 2 special design or second special design) variable display, for example, in the decorative design display area that becomes a plurality of variable display parts such as three, the decorative design that is identification information (decoration identification information) is variable Is displayed. The variable display of this decoration pattern is also included in the variable display game. As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged.

A reserved memory display area 5H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the reserved memory display area 5H, a reserved display is performed for identifiably displaying the reserved number of variable display corresponding to the special figure game (special figure reserved memory number). The pending display may be anything that can be displayed in correspondence with the pending storage of information relating to the variable display. Along with the pending memory display area 5H, or instead of the pending memory display area 5H, the pending display using the first pending display 25A and the second pending display 25B may be performed.

FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of various substrates, peripheral devices, and the like. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with various boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a lamp output board 13, a backup memory board 14, and an effect data memory board 16 as shown in FIG. In addition, a relay board 15, a performance control relay board 17, an audio output board 18, a driver board 19, and the like are also mounted. Furthermore, various substrates such as a power supply substrate, a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate, a touch sensor substrate, etc. may be mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and electrical components are mounted, but also electrical components are mounted (mounted) on electronic circuit boards to achieve specific electrical functions. It is a concept including an electronic circuit mounting board configured as follows.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that power from an AC power supply, which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 by the power supply board. It is The power supply board includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC), etc. I have. The power supply voltage generated by the power board may be supplied to the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the like via the drawer relay board.

The main board 11 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like. In the main substrate 11, signals received from various detection switches such as the gate switch 21, the starting switch (the first starting switch 22A and the second starting switch 22B), and the count switch 23 are sent through the switch circuit 110. It is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 . The gate switch 21 detects a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 (a gate-passing ball). Based on the detection of the gate passing ball by the gate switch 21, the variable display of the normal design by the normal design display 20 can be executed. The first starting opening switch 22A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A. The second starting opening switch 22B detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The count switch 23 detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 . When game balls passing through various winning openings such as the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening are detected, the number of prize balls is determined in advance corresponding to each winning opening. A game ball as is paid out.

In the main board 11, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is transmitted through the solenoid circuit 111 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. Solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in a state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (or does not pass) and a state in which it is easy to pass (or passes) through the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. and changeable. A solenoid 82 for a large winning opening door makes the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 changeable between a state in which a game ball cannot pass and a state in which the game ball can pass. From the main board 11, a command signal for controlling the display of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20 and the like is transmitted.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a RAM 102 for providing a work area for game control. , a CPU 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data representing random numbers independently of the CPU 103, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. configured with. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, for example, a random number circuit 104 and a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 generate various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game. Numerical data to indicate is counted (generated) in an updatable manner. A random number used to control the progress of a game is also called a game random number.

The main board 11 has a setting key 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting switch functioning as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big win (ball output rate) in the setting change state. A changeover switch 52 is connected. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be installed at predetermined positions on the main board 11, or may be attached outside the main board 11, for example, at predetermined positions on the power supply board. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 that can be opened by operating a predetermined key is opened. Only the person in charge who owns it can operate it. Since the setting key 51 requires a key operation, only a staff member who has a key for operating the setting key 51 can operate the setting key 51 among staff members of the game arcade. The setting key 51 is a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF by a predetermined key operation, and is also a switch that can perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, pressing operation).

Various sensors such as a door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of the glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable are connected to the main board 11. Based on the detection signals output from these sensors, , and a function to determine the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors). A switch circuit 110 on the main board 11 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) includes each winning opening (first large winning opening, second large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entering area ”), and the display monitor 29 displays various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios. By displaying such winning information, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios after installation in the game arcade. On the side of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1, it is common to design the game board surface so that game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, whether or not adjustments have been made, what kind of adjustments have been made, and as a result of the adjustments, the game balls enter the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. is checked (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of adjustment after installation and the details thereof.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. , a game effect lamp 9, a performance motor 60, a performance LED 61, and other performance devices, various circuits for controlling performance operations by various performance electric parts are mounted. The production control board 12 controls the image display in the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the light-emitting members constituting the game effect lamp 9 and the production LED 61, and the production motor 60 for moving the production movable member. It has a function of determining the control contents for causing the electric parts for performance to execute a predetermined performance operation, such as the driving operation of the. Electronic components such as an effect control microcomputer 120, an external ROM 121, and an external RAM 121 are mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG.

The effect control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting video signals to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting illumination signals to the lamp output board 13, and backup memory board 14. Wiring for transmitting control signals and the like, wiring for transmitting performance data signals to and from the performance data memory board 16, and the like are connected. Wiring for transmitting various signals to the audio output board 18 and the driver board 19 is also connected via the effect control relay board 17 . The information signal transmitted to the audio output board 18 may include an audio signal (sound effect signal) designating audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The information signal transmitted to the driver board 19 may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the performance movable member by driving the performance motor 60 . The information signal transmitted to the driver board 19 may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting the performance LED 61 . A wiring for receiving an operation detection signal may be connected to the effect control board 12 . The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that a player's motion using the stick controller 31A has been detected. The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that the player's motion using the push button 31B has been detected.

The lamp output board 13 is a board for lamp output that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and according to the illumination signal from the effect control board 12, a driver IC or the like that supplies a driving current to the game effect lamp 9 or the like. is installed. The backup memory board 14 is a board for storing backup data provided separately from the effect control board 12, and according to the backup control signal from the effect control board 12, it is possible to execute the writing process and the reading process of the backup data. It is configured. The backup data write process writes and stores the backup data in the backup data memory. In the backup data reading process, the backup data stored in the backup data memory is read and transmitted to the effect control board 12 or the like. The effect data memory board 16 is a board for storing effect data provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is configured to be able to read out the effect data according to the effect data control signal from the effect control board 12. ing. The effect data reading process reads the effect data stored in the effect data memory and transmits it to the effect control board 12 or the like. The performance data memory board 16 is equipped with a performance data memory capable of storing performance data. The performance data memory includes a storage area for storing various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, a storage area for storing various sound data representing sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a performance motor 60. A storage area for storing various motor data indicating the details of drive control, a storage area for storing various light emission data indicating details of lighting control for the game effect lamp 9 and the performance LED 61, etc. may be provided in advance. The effect data memory may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as flash memory such as NAND-ROM, or a non-volatile recording medium such as magnetic memory or optical memory. Any one of the above may be used.

The effect control relay board 17 is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 2, and relays various signals transmitted from the effect control board 12 toward the audio output board 18 and the driver board 19.例文帳に追加The back pack may be attached to the central portion of the back side of the game board 2, and an opening facing the image display device 5 may be formed in the center. The back pack may be provided so as to cover part or all of the main substrate 11, the lamp output substrate 13, the audio output substrate 18, and the driver substrate 19 from behind. A performance control board box in which part or all of the performance control board 12, the backup memory board 14, and the performance data memory board 16 are accommodated may be attached to the rear side of the back pack. The main board 11 may be accommodated in a board case together with setting keys 51 and setting changeover switches 52 that can be operated by a game hall attendant or the like. In this case, the display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 arranged on the main board 11 may also be accommodated in the board case. The setting key 51, the setting changeover switch 52, and the display changeover switch 30 may be exposed through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case. The audio output board 18 is a board for audio output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and according to the audio signal from the effect control board 12, to output the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R serving as sound output devices. Various circuits are installed. The driver board 19 is a drive control board provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on the information signal from the effect control board 12, the drive signal of the effect motor 60 and the lighting signal of the effect LED 61 A driver IC and the like to supply are mounted.

A security cover may be attached to cover the substrate case housing the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the rear side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. In a state where the game machine frame 3 is closed, a security cover covers the substrate case housing the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加As a result, the setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 are inoperable when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. When the game machine frame 3 is open, the security cover is separated from the substrate case, so that the operation of the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 is permitted. The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. In addition, by covering the board case including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 with the security cover, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being operated from inside the game island where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command may include a display control command. A display control command is used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5 . The effect control command may include a voice control command. Audio control commands are used to control the audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R. The effect control command may include a lighting control command. The lighting control command is used to control the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the performance LED 61 . The movable control command is used for motion control of the performance movable member by the driving force of the performance motor 60, and the like. Each of these commands may constitute an effect control command separately, or a combination of some or all of them may constitute an effect control command.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 are provided. Incidentally, the random number circuit 104 is not limited to being built in the game control microcomputer 100 , and may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100 .

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals. The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of various random numbers used to control the progress of the game.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals that are various control commands from the main board 11, and a fluctuation pattern table storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns. The table data etc. to be used are stored.

FIG. 3 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. Some or all of the electronic components such as the production control microcomputer 120, the external ROM 121, and the external RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 are detachable by inserting or removing a connector pin from the connector socket. may be attached, and other components may be mountably attached by soldering or the like. Connectors 150 to 156 are mounted on the effect control board 12 together with these electronic components. The performance control microcomputer 120 includes a CPU 131, an internal ROM 132, an internal RAM 133, a watchdog timer 134, a timer circuit 135, an interrupt controller 136, a serial communication circuit 137, a clock circuit 138, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 140, and an audio processing circuit. 141 , lamp control circuit 142 , and motor control circuit 143 . The production control microcomputer 120 may be a production control microprocessor that integrates these electronic components. The CPU 131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. The internal ROM 132 fixedly stores a basic program of control processing executed by the CPU 131 such as firmware, system setting data specific to the production control microcomputer 120, and the like. The internal RAM 133 provides a work area for the CPU 131 . The watchdog timer 134 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and when the measurement time passes the monitoring time (timeout time) and timeout occurs, it becomes a time elapsing signal. generate a signal. The CPU 131 periodically clears and restarts the watchdog timer 134 . When the processing of the CPU 131 is delayed due to some failure or the like and the watchdog timer 134 cannot be cleared and the measurement time elapses, a timeout signal is generated and the processing by the CPU 131 is reset.

The timer circuit 135 is configured by incorporating, for example, four channels (CH0 to CH3) of an 8-bit programmable counter, and is a circuit capable of generating real-time interrupts and measuring time. The timer circuit 135 starts counting down at predetermined intervals from an initial count value set in advance for each channel, and when there is a channel whose count value becomes "00", the interrupt flag corresponding to that channel is set to ON state. do. At this time, if the interrupt is enabled, the timer circuit 135 causes the interrupt controller 136 to generate an interrupt request to the CPU 131 . The timer circuit 135 may have a function as an RTC (Real Time Clock). The RTC can measure the current date and time and output date and time information including date information and time information.

The interrupt controller 136 is a circuit capable of controlling various interrupt requests generated by the effect control microcomputer 120 . The interrupts controlled by interrupt controller 136 include multiple types of interrupts, such as X-class interrupts (XIRQ), I-class interrupts (IRQ), software interrupts (SWI), and illegal opcode traps (ILGOP). You can The interrupt controller 136 has an interrupt control register for setting the permission/prohibition of interrupt and the priority of interrupt for each type of interrupt. For example, the interrupt controller 136 may be provided with interrupt control registers corresponding to various interrupts, such as serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting. Note that the V-sync interrupt is an interrupt that coincides with the timing at which a vertical synchronization signal is output from the VDP 140 that draws an effect image or the like on the image display device 5 . The interrupt control register corresponding to each interrupt contains internal information data (interrupt permission/prohibition data) indicating whether the corresponding interrupt is permitted or not, and internal information data (interrupt priority) indicating the priority of the corresponding interrupt. data) can be set. For example, if the value of the interrupt permission/prohibition data is "0", the corresponding interrupt is set to the enabled state, and if the value of the interrupt permission/prohibition data is "1", the corresponding interrupt is disabled. state. The interrupt priority is set by, for example, interrupt priority data in 16 steps (4 bits). (=FH)”, the priority of the corresponding interrupt is the lowest. Not limited to interrupt control registers for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting. , an interrupt control register may be provided for any interrupt related to the control of the presentation.

The internal information data set in the interrupt control register is set in advance in a predetermined area (program management area, etc.) of the internal ROM 132 . When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 131 sets the serial communication circuit 137, sets the random number generation, sets the internal reset operation, etc. according to the setting contents of the program management area. At this time, the internal information data of interrupt control registers corresponding to various interrupts, such as serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting provided in the interrupt controller 136, are set. As a result, serial reception interrupts, timer interrupts, V sync interrupts, etc. are set. For example, in the interrupt control registers for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting, the interrupt permission/prohibition data in the internal information data all indicate a value of "0", and the serial The receive interrupt, timer interrupt, and Vsync interrupt are all set to the enabled state. The interrupt priority data in the internal information data is such that serial reception interrupts have a higher priority than timer interrupts, and timer interrupts have a higher priority than V sync interrupts. are set with corresponding 4-bit values. A reset controller may be provided inside or outside the interrupt controller 136 . The reset controller controls various resets generated by the effect control microcomputer 120 . Resets controlled by the reset controller include system resets and user resets. A system reset occurs when a low level signal is input to the SRST terminal for a certain period of time. The user reset is triggered when a low-level signal is input to the URST terminal for a certain period of time, when the timeout signal of the watchdog timer 134 is generated, and when an out-of-designated-area travel prohibition (IAT) signal is generated. It occurs due to a predetermined user reset factor, such as when it occurs.

The serial communication circuit 137 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data by a serial communication method to various boards and various circuits other than the effect control board 12 . The serial communication circuit 137 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data compatible with multiple types of serial communication standards such as UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter), SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). The serial communication circuit 137 may include a plurality of communication processing units including a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a communication control unit, a serial communication data register, a serial status register, a serial control register, and the like. UART is an asynchronous serial communication standard, and transfers communication data using a start bit and a stop bit. In this case, the clock signal line becomes unnecessary, but the communication speed (baud rate) becomes relatively low. SPI and I2C are clock-synchronous serial communication standards, and transfer communication data using a clock signal. In this case, a clock signal line is required, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively high. In the case of SPI, signal lines are provided respectively corresponding to a clock signal, a transmission data signal, a reception data signal, and a slave selection signal. In the case of I2C, signal lines corresponding to clock signals and data signals are provided. The plurality of communication processing units included in the serial communication circuit 137 may have different hardware configurations according to the plurality of types of serial communication standards. The clock circuit 138 is a circuit that generates a clock signal to be supplied to each circuit of the production control microcomputer 120, such as the CPU 131 and the VDP 140, for example. For example, the clock circuit divides the external clock input to the clock input terminal to generate an internal system clock signal and supplies it to each circuit of the effect control microcomputer 120 .

The VDP 140 determines control details of image display in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 140 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays. The VDP 140 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 140 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The audio processing circuit 141 can generate audio signals used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 131 and VDP 140. FIG. The lamp control circuit 142 can generate an illumination signal corresponding to a lighting mode (light-emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, or blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the performance LED 61 . The motor control circuit 143 can generate drive control signals used to drive the performance motor 60 .

The external ROM 121 contains, as specific contents of the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 120, various data such as instruction codes constituting system programs and user programs executed by the CPU 131, management data, table data, effect control patterns, and the like. is permanently stored. The external RAM 122 serves as an auxiliary area for the internal RAM 133 and temporarily stores various data. The connectors 150 to 156 are configured using, for example, receptacles, and have a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting various signal wirings. The connectors 150 to 156 make it possible to output various signals via different paths such as mutually different wiring patterns in the effect control board 12 . The connector 150 is a connector port for main substrate wiring that can connect the main substrate wiring that is electrically connected to the main substrate 11 . The connector 151 is a connector port for power supply wiring to which power supply wiring electrically connected to a power supply unit such as a power supply board can be connected. The connector 152 is a connector port for effect relay wiring that can connect the effect relay wire that is electrically connected to the effect relay unit such as the effect control relay board 17 . The connector 153 is a connector port for frame lamp wiring that can connect the frame lamp wiring electrically connected between the lamp output board 13 and the frame lamp portion on which part or all of the game effect lamp 9 is provided. be. The connector 154 is a connector port for backup wiring to which a backup wiring that is electrically connected to a backup unit such as the backup memory board 14 can be connected. The connector 155 is a connector port for effect data wiring to which the effect data wiring electrically connected to the effect data part such as the effect data memory board 16 can be connected. The connector 156 is an inspection wiring connector port capable of connecting an inspection wiring that is electrically connected to an information processing apparatus (such as a personal computer) for inspection, testing, or development. The inspection information processing device may function as an inspection device for the pachinko game machine 1 by executing a specific software program, for example. Thus, the connector 156 is an electronic component used as a connection member to which the inspection device of the pachinko game machine 1 is connected.

The connector 156 can be connected to an inspection wiring at, for example, the trial production stage, the development stage, or the manufacturing stage of the pachinko game machine 1, and the production control microcomputer 120 is shipped according to a test command different from the production control command. A previous inspection process may be made executable. Pre-shipment inspection process, for example, before the completion of the software program during prototyping or development, internal parameters and input/output signals when the performance control microcomputer 120 executes part or all of the program code, It may include verifiable processing. The verification environment in which the inspection process is executed before shipment may be, for example, an execution environment corresponding to the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming machine installation island, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be operated independently on a personal computer. It may also be an execution environment in which the operating status can be checked by connecting to an information processing device such as. In addition, the connector 156 can be connected to an inspection wiring at the stage of collecting the pachinko game machine 1, for example, and can execute the reading process of the backup data according to a test command different from the effect control command. good. Alternatively, the connector 156 may be removed at the shipping stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Alternatively, the connector 156 is installed only in a predetermined model such as a demonstration or test model other than the model of the pachinko game machine 1 installed in the game hall, and the model (mass production machine) that is mass-produced and installed in the game hall It may not be mounted. A land on which the connector 156 can be mounted may be formed on the board surface of the effect control board 12 . When the connector 156 is removed or not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land where the connector 156 is no longer mounted may be soldered. The soldering process is a process of applying solder to the exposed portions of the copper foil pattern, and may be performed using, for example, a cream solder printer, or may be performed by any method that does not use a cream solder printer. . When the connector 156 is mounted and when it is not mounted, the same soldering process may be performed, or different soldering processes may be performed. When the soldering process is performed in the same process, there is no need to fabricate multiple patterns of the metal mask used in the cream solder printing machine for applying solder to the lands, thus preventing an increase in the costs required to fabricate the board. Soldering the unmounted lands, such as the connector 156, on which electronic components are not mounted prevents oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevents problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and appropriately maintains the quality of the board. be able to.

In addition, when an electronic component such as the connector 156 is not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the electronic component is not mounted is not limited to being soldered and coated. It may be coated. By covering the lands on which electronic components are not mounted in this way, it is possible to prevent oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and appropriately maintain the quality of the board. I wish I could. On the other hand, lands on which electronic components are not mounted may not be covered by soldering or the like. For example, when lands are soldered, solder as a conductor adheres to the copper foil pattern, which may cause an unintended short circuit or current path in the wiring pattern. Therefore, by not soldering the lands on which electronic components are not mounted, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in wiring patterns and changes in current paths, and ensure proper board quality. can be maintained. By performing insulation film treatment instead of soldering, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in wiring patterns and changes in current paths, and appropriately maintain the quality of the board. You may do so.

FIG. 4A shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the backup memory board 14. As shown in FIG. The backup memory board 14 is provided with a memory controller 200, an RTC 201, a serial communication circuit 202, a test connection section 203, backup data memories 210A to 210D, and a connector 220. FIG. Thus, the backup memory board 14 is provided with backup data memories 210A to 210D as a plurality of backup data storage units. The memory controller 200 can perform write processing and read processing of backup data according to the backup control signal from the effect control board 12 . The RTC 201 can measure the current date and time and supply date and time information including date information and time information to the memory controller 200 . The serial communication circuit 202 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from the effect control board 12 by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 202 may be capable of transmitting/receiving communication data conforming to a specific serial communication standard such as SPI. The serial communication circuit 202 only needs to have a communication processing section with a hardware configuration compatible with such a specific serial communication standard. The inspection connecting portion 203 may be formed as a specific conductor portion, such as a test point, including terminals capable of inputting and outputting inspection signals. When the test connection portion 203 is a test point, the test probe is brought into contact with the test connection portion 203, and input/output of the test signal is performed between the test device and the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12. or read backup data. The inspection connection unit 203 receives an inspection signal between the inspection device and the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 or the backup data memories 210A to 210D without going through the performance control microcomputer 120 of the performance control board 12. It may also be possible to perform output, readout of backup data, and the like. In this way, the testing connection section 203 can provide an interface for performing data communication with the testing device, which is an external device, in the backup memory board 14 .

The backup data memories 210A-210D may be configured in part or in whole using non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), and in part or in full using SRAM (Static RAM) with a battery. may be configured using The backup data memories 210A to 210D may be partially or wholly configured using flash memory such as NAND-ROM, EEPROM, or HDD (Hard Disk Drive). A non-volatile ferroelectric memory called FRAM (registered trademark) has a memory cell using a ferroelectric film as a capacitor insulating film, and even when the operating power supply is turned off, the memory written in the memory cell remains unchanged. No data is lost. A configuration using FRAM (registered trademark) does not require a battery backup for data retention, and achieves high-speed writing, high number of rewrites, and low power consumption compared to non-volatile memories such as flash memory, EEPROM, and HDD. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in installation area, simplify the device configuration, improve operation efficiency, and appropriately store and save backup data. In addition, the disposal of the battery becomes unnecessary, the disappearance of the stored contents due to the replacement of the battery is prevented, and the backup data can be properly stored and preserved. The backup data memories 210A to 210D may be backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board. In this manner, the backup data memories 210A to 210D can retain their stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The backup data memories 210A to 210D may be capable of holding stored contents without using a backup power source, for example, when part or all of them are configured using FRAM (registered trademark). Alternatively, the backup data memories 210A and 210B may be able to retain their stored contents using a backup power supply, for example, when part or all of them are configured using battery-equipped SRAMs.

The backup memory board 14 uses the date and time information output by the RTC 201 to store and store various types of log information in log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D. The memory controller 200 can perform write processing and read processing of stored data to the backup data memories 210A to 210D according to commands and instructions sent from the performance control microcomputer 120 of the performance control board 12. In this case, by executing the write process and the read process of the stored data indicating the log information including the date and time information, the operation history, setting history, It suffices if the error history and the like can be stored so as to be verifiable after the fact.

FIG. 4B shows a configuration example for connecting the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 . The performance control board 12 has a connector 154 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14 . The backup memory board 14 is provided with a connector 220 detachable from the connector 154 of the effect control board 12. - 特許庁By coupling the connector 154 and the connector 220, the performance control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 can be physically and electrically connected. A connector 154 provided on the performance control board 12 has terminals TM01 to TM06. A connector 220 provided on the backup memory board 14 has terminals TM11 to TM16. Terminals TM01 to TM06 provided in connector 154 and terminals TM11 to TM16 provided in connector 220 are physically and electrically connected to corresponding terminals (for example, terminal TM01 and terminal TM11) when connector 154 and connector 220 are coupled. It is sufficient if the relationship is connected to

A terminal TM01 provided in the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 can provide a specific voltage such as VD1. A terminal TM02 provided in the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 can receive a specific voltage VD1 used for confirming connection with the backup memory board 14 . For example, the specific voltage VD1 output from the terminal TM01 of the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 is supplied to the terminal TM11 of the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14 . Terminals TM11 and TM12 of connector 220 may be short-circuited on the substrate of backup memory substrate 14 . Therefore, when the connector 154 and the connector 220 are coupled, a voltage corresponding to VD1 is supplied from the terminal TM12 of the connector 220 on the backup board 14 to the terminal TM02 of the connector 154 on the effect control board 12. be. On the other hand, in the unconnected state in which the connector 154 and the connector 220 are not coupled, the supply of voltage to the terminal TM02 of the connector 154 in the effect control board 12 is not performed.

In the effect control board 12, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 154 in order to confirm the connection state with the backup memory board . In this case, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a high voltage value corresponding to VD1, it can be determined that the performance control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 are connected (connected state). On the other hand, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a low voltage value corresponding to voltage non-supply, it can be determined that the performance control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 are not connected (unconnected state). In this way, the connection state between the performance control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 may be checked based on the voltage at the terminal TM02, which serves as a connection checking member. It should be noted that the connection state is not limited to being confirmed based on the terminal voltage, and the connection state may be confirmed based on the input state of a specific signal, for example. Alternatively, the connection state may be confirmed using a switch or sensor as a connection confirmation member.

The terminals TM03 to TM06 provided in the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 are wire-connected to the serial communication circuit 137 provided in the effect control microcomputer 120 . The terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14 are connected to the serial communication circuit 202 by wiring. Therefore, the wires connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 154 and the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 220 are connected via the serial communication circuit 137 and the serial communication circuit 202 to the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 and the backup memory board. Electrical connections are provided so that stored data can be transferred to and from the 14 backup data memories 210A-210D. The terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14 are wire-connected to the test connecting portion 203 . As a result, the wires connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 154 and the terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 220 are connected via the serial communication circuit 137 to the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 and the backup memory board 14 for inspection. An electrical connection is provided between the connection unit 203 and transmission/reception of inspection signals and transfer of stored data.

The backup memory board 14 is configured to be detachable from the performance control board 12 . As a result, for example, in the case of the pachinko game machine 1 that does not use the backup data memories 210A to 210D, the backup memory board 14 can be removed, thereby increasing the flexibility of the device configuration and increasing the manufacturing cost. can be prevented. In addition, since the stored data can be read and analyzed by removing the backup memory board 14, the workload of checking the stored data can be reduced. The RTC provided in the timer circuit 135 of the performance control microcomputer 120 provided in the performance control board 12 may provide the current time for timing adjustment for executing performances in which, for example, a plurality of pachinko game machines 1 are interlocked. There is a need for relatively high accuracy. On the other hand, the RTC 201 of the backup memory board 14 only needs to be able to identify the context of the memory processing executed for the backup data memories 210A to 210D. can be done. As described above, the RTC 201 of the backup memory board 14 only needs to be of relatively low accuracy, so that an increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented. In addition, the structure and function with which the backup memory board|substrate 14 is provided may be comprised so that the production|presentation control board 12 may be provided. For example, the configuration and functions of backup data memories 210A-210D may be implemented by external RAM 122. FIG. Even in this case, for example, the wiring pattern in the effect control board 12, or a switch or a sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is played using game balls as game media, and a predetermined game value can be imparted based on the game result. As an example of a game using game balls, when a player performs a predetermined operation (for example, rotating operation) on a ball hitting operation handle provided at the lower right position of the game machine frame 3 in the pachinko game machine 1, a predetermined A game ball as a game medium is shot toward the game area by a shooting motor or the like provided in the hitting ball shooting device. When the game balls flowing down the game area pass through (enter) various winning holes, the game balls are paid out as prize balls. For example, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 can execute the normal pattern game. In the general pattern game, variable display of normal patterns is performed, and when a specific normal pattern that is a normal pattern winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". When the variable display of the normal pattern is performed and the normal pattern which becomes the normal pattern losing pattern other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". In the case of "general figure hit", opening control is performed to open the normal variable winning ball device 6B in a predetermined period, and the second start winning opening is opened. When the game ball passes through the first starting winning hole formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the first starting winning occurs. When the game ball passes through the second starting winning hole formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting winning occurs. Based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize and the second start winning prize, the variable display of special symbols and decoration symbols can be executed. The special symbols include the jackpot symbols and the winning symbols. When the jackpot symbols are stopped (derived), the variable display result becomes "big hit", and when the winning symbols are stopped (derived), the variable display results. is "losing". When the result of the variable display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is a "big hit", the big prize opening is opened to allow the game ball to easily pass through (enter), thereby creating an advantageous state for the player. It will be in a jackpot game state.

The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10").

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG. In the game control main process, it is set to prohibit interrupts (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

After the initial setting, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear switch is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board, and when the power is turned on with the clear switch on, a clear signal in the on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If such a clear signal has not been input, it may be determined in step S3 that the clear switch is off. The backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 that serves as a backup RAM for game control. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S3, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on, and if it is on, it is determined that there is backup data. It is determined whether or not the backup data saved in this manner matches when the power supply is stopped and when the power supply is restarted, for example, using a parity bit or checksum. If they match, it can be determined that the backup RAM is normal in step S3.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) and setting confirmation processing (step S5) are executed. In the recovery process of step S4, the work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, it is sufficient if the fluctuation of the special symbols can be resumed from the state before the restoration. If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) and a setting change process (step S7) are executed. In the initialization process of step S6, a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102 is performed, and initial values are set in the work area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. For example, the setting confirmation condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on at the start of power supply when the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed. Established when both conditions are satisfied. If the output signal from the door open sensor 90 is OFF or if the setting key 51 is OFF, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied, and the setting confirmation process is terminated. When the output signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. It is to be noted that the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including that the clear switch is turned off is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear switch is off, the fact that the clear switch is off can also be included in the setting confirmation condition. In the setting confirmation process of step S5, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, the shooting of the game ball by operating the batted ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, the accompanying game stop state is ended, and a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. For example, the setting change condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON at the start of power supply when the setting change process of step S7 is executed. Established when both conditions are satisfied. Also, the setting change condition may include that the clear switch is on. In the setting change process of step S7, if the output signal from the door open sensor 90 is OFF, if the setting key 51 is OFF, or if the clear switch is OFF, the setting change condition is established. It is determined that there was not, and the setting change process is terminated. When the output signal from the door open sensor 90 is ON, when the setting key 51 is ON, and when the clear switch is ON, it is determined that the setting change condition is established. . When the setting change condition is established, a setting change state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a setting change start command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. For example, every time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the set value is updated as "1"→"2"→"3"→"1"→. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the This notifies the staff of the game arcade or the like that the new set values have been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 . When ending the setting change state, the accompanying game stop state ends, and a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the performance LED 61 may emit light in a predetermined manner. When the setting is being checked or changed, based on the detection of the operation of pressing the operation button for effect such as the push button 31B, a message such as "maintenance mode" is displayed and the maintenance mode is entered. may be configured. The "maintenance mode" includes, for example, the date and time setting in the RTC of the timer circuit 135, various error occurrence history (recording when and what kind of error occurred), setting change history (when the set value was changed, and so on). In this mode, you can check the record of the set value after change). When the setting key 51 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode may also be terminated.

In this way, if the setting key 51 is on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on) when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step S7 are performed. is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. On the other hand, if the setting key 51 is turned off when the power is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed, but the setting change state is not controlled, and the clear switch is turned on. If it is off, the restoration process of step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process of step S5 or the setting change process of step S7, the random number circuit setting process is executed (step S8). The random number circuit setting process is a process for initializing the random number circuit 104 so that the numerical data representing the game random numbers can be updated. The random number circuit 104 may autonomously update the numerical data indicating the game random number even if the random number circuit setting process by the CPU 103 is not executed. Subsequently, an interrupt initialization process is executed (step S9). The interrupt initial setting process is a process in which permission or rejection of interrupt and priority can be set according to the interrupt factor generated in the game control microcomputer 100 . For example, the CPU 103 reads the interrupt initial setting information stored in a predetermined area (program management area, etc.) of the ROM 101, and sets permission/prohibition and priority of the interrupt according to the read value for each interrupt factor. . Interrupt initial setting process, by performing the register setting of the CTC that is built in the game control microcomputer 100, a predetermined time (such as 2 milliseconds) including the process of generating a periodic timer interrupt every You can After that, after setting the interrupt permission (step S10), the loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (eg, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. The CPU 103 that receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request executes game control timer interrupt processing.

The game control timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 may include switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, and command control processing. . The switch process is a process of determining whether or not there is a detection signal received by the CPU 103 from various switches via the switch circuit 110 . The main-side error processing is processing for diagnosing an abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issuing a warning according to the diagnosis result. The information output processing includes, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), starting information (information indicating the number of starting winnings, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, This is a process that enables the output of data such as probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variation state has occurred). The game random number update process is a process that allows software to update at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side. The special symbol process process is a process that enables execution and suspension management of a special symbol game, control of a big hit game state and a small hit game state, control of a game state, and the like. Normal pattern process processing includes management of execution and suspension of a normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), and variable winning balls based on "normal pattern winning". This is a process that makes it possible to control the opening of the device 6B. The command control process is a process that enables the effect control command set for transmission to be transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 .

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, first, the starting winning determination process is executed. After executing the starting prize determination process, one of a plurality of processes is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102 . The processing that can be selected according to the value of the special symbol process flag is special symbol normal processing, variation pattern setting processing, special symbol variation processing, special symbol stop processing, jackpot opening pre-processing, jackpot opening middle processing, jackpot opening post-processing, It is only necessary to include part or all of the processing according to the game control program, such as jackpot end processing, small win opening preprocessing, small win opening processing, and small winning end processing.

In the starting winning determination process, it is determined whether or not the first starting winning or the second starting winning has occurred, and if it has occurred, setting for updating the number of pending memories is performed. The number of pending memories indicates the number of variable displays of special symbols and decorative symbols that have not yet started. In the special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start execution of the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit". Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, setting of a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, etc. is performed corresponding to the variable display result. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variable display result and the like. In the special symbol variation process, setting for varying the special symbol, setting for measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation, and the like are performed. In the special symbol stop process, setting for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol and stopping and displaying (deriving) the determined special symbol that is the variable display result is performed.

In the big win opening pre-processing, setting for opening the big winning opening in the big win game state corresponding to the variable display result "big win" is performed. In the process during the opening of the big win, it is determined whether or not to return the big winning opening opened in the big win game state to the closed state. In the process after opening the jackpot, after returning the jackpot to the closed state, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit. Settings for ending the jackpot game state are performed. In the jackpot end processing, after waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending performance for informing the end of the jackpot game state elapses, setting for starting variable probability control and time saving control is performed. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the variable display result corresponds to the "small hit", setting for opening the big winning opening in the small winning game state, and the like are performed. In the process during opening of the small hit, determination of whether or not to return the large winning opening opened in the small hit game state to the closed state is performed. In the small winning end processing, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state after waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for reporting the end of the small winning game state is executed elapses. Settings are made to continue.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. In the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) can be changed. The setting value consists of three levels from "1" to "3", with "1" having the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value in the order of "1", "2", and "3", the higher the ball payout rate. . That is, when "1" is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of "2" and "3". It should be noted that the odds of winning a small hit may be the same regardless of the set value.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with the random number MR1 for display result determination are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol (special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is the object of variable display. And when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2" (second), that is, the second special symbol (special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is the object of variable display For each case, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set. 6A shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "1", FIG. 6B shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "2", and FIG. The display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "3" is shown.

When the set value uses the display result determination table corresponding to "1", if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display If the set value is "2" or "3", a jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-variable probability, 1/32 at variable probability). When the set value is "1" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), part of the determination value is set as a determination value corresponding to the small hit, and the set value is If the set value is "1", the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set value is "2" or "3". When the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the same judgment value as when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is "1" (first) as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit It is set, and even if the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 at non-variable, 1/32) to win the jackpot. If the set value is "1" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), half of the judgment value is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. As in the case where the values are "2" and "3", a small hit is won with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is the object of variable display.

When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value "2", if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), the set value is higher than the case of "1" Win a big hit with a probability (1/300 for non-probability, 1/30 for probability). When the set value is "2", if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second) as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit 1) The same determination value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable) to win a big hit. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "3", if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), the setting value is "1", "2" Winning a big hit with a higher probability than in the case (1/280 at non-probability, 1/28 at probability). When the set value is "3", if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second 1) The same determination value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/280 when non-variable, 1/28 when variable) wins the jackpot.

The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value, and determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win. When the value of MR1 coincides with any hit determination value corresponding to a small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. As a result, the winning of the big win and the winning of the small win are determined with a probability according to the set value. The "probability" here indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to control to a big win game state, and the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B are changed to the big win symbols. It is also a matter of deciding whether to Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, and the stop symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is small. It is also to decide whether or not to use a winning pattern. The odds of winning a small hit may differ according to the set value. For example, similar to the winning probability of the big win, the odds of winning the small win may be increased in the order of "1", "2", and "3". The setting difference of the winning probability of the small win may be set to have the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big win. If the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "1" is 1/100, the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "2" is designed to be 1/93.75, and the setting value "3". It may be set so that the probability of winning a small hit in 2 is 1/87.5. When the pachinko game machine 1 is not provided with a small hit, a display result determination table excluding the hit determination value corresponding to the small win may be used. A big hit determination table and a small hit determination table are provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is made by the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer value. A common table is used to determine the small hit, and a separate table is used when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first) and when it is "2" (second) may be used. It may be configured such that the order of the advantage changes according to the game state. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability/high base state, is maintained in the high probability/high base state until the next big win occurs, and is configured so that a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained in a small win game. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2, and it can be a period in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball, so a specific game state (in this example, High Probability / High Base State), unlike other game states, the set value "1" is the setting with the highest degree of advantage, in which it is difficult for a big hit to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). may After being controlled to the probability variable state (high probability state), when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variable state ends based on the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times (the probability variable end number), even if it is the same probability variable end number For example, the variable probability continuation rate (continuous home rate) may be configured to increase in the order of set value "1"<set value "2"<set value "3". The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be two or four or more.

When the result of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is "big win", the big win type may be set. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these may be As the jackpot types, there may be provided jackpot types in which many prize balls can be obtained, jackpot types in which few prize balls can be obtained, or jackpot types in which few prize balls can be obtained. To determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of jackpot types A to C based on a random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a ``jackpot''. You may provide the jackpot classification determination table referred to. In the jackpot type determination table, a decision value may be assigned so that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on which of the set values is "1" to "3". For example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determination to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2", the percentage of determination to the jackpot type B is high, and the set value is "3". , the determination value may be assigned such that the percentage of the jackpot type A being determined is high.

A fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period in the jackpot game may be determined for each jackpot type. The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which pre-processing for the opening of the special symbol process is executed on the main board 11 side, and the start of the big win game state is started after the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side. This is the period in which the fanfare effect as the effect action to be notified is executed. The interval period is, for example, on the main board 11 side, a period during which the special symbol process process after the opening of the jackpot is executed. It is a period during which an interval production is executed as a production operation for notifying the start of the round. The ending period is, for example, a period during which the big hit end processing of the special symbol process is executed on the main substrate 11 side, and the ending performance as a performance operation for notifying the end of the big win game state is executed on the performance control board 12 side. It is the period during which As an example, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period may be set to be the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the shortest in the case of the jackpot type C. . When the set value is "1", the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to become relatively short if the ratio of determination as the jackpot type C increases. When the set value is "3", if the ratio of judgment as jackpot type A increases, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to become relatively long. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be lengthened in the order of the setting values "1"<"2"<"3".

The probability of winning a jackpot (percentage of winning balls) increases in the order of set values ``1'' < ``2'' < ``3'', and at the same time, the set values ``1'' < ``2'' < ``3''. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be lengthened in this order. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, thereby increasing the gambling property. can be prevented from becoming too high. During the big win game, it may be constituted so as to be able to execute a big win suggesting performance suggesting a set value. The jackpot suggesting effect can be executed during the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. Also, by directing the player's interest to the effect suggesting during the big win, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the length of each period. In the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image, etc.) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is executed in common. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set regardless of the set values. Any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of selecting the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period in which relatively long periods are set is high in the order of jackpot types A<B<C. By doing so, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period can be lengthened in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3".

The number of times of time reduction control and probability variable control may be different for each jackpot type, and in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high accuracy control and time reduction control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are performed by the jackpot game. After the end of the state, the game may be continuously executed until a big win occurs again. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, a jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the percentage of big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the variable probability continuation rate (continuous game rate) may be made to differ for each set value. For each jackpot type, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, presence/absence of time reduction control and variable probability control, and the number of times of control may be changed to give different advantages. In this case, the performance during the round may be different for each big win type, or may be the same regardless of the big win type. Depending on the set values, there may be one or a plurality of jackpot types that cannot be determined among jackpot types A, jackpot types B, and jackpot types C. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%), or to set a specific jackpot type to 100%. It involves determining a percentage. The fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period may be made different regardless of the jackpot type. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to which of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, according to which of the set values "1" to "3", a lottery process is performed according to the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are determined. You may It is sufficient if the interest in the game can be improved by changing the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot" according to the set value. The jackpot type may be determined using the random number MR1 for display result determination. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁

A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. The special period may be the period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Using the RTC of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like, a predetermined time period (for example, from 10:00 am to 11:00 am) may be set as a special period. The period until the first big hit occurs may be the special period. In the special period, the ratio of normal reach loss is higher than in the non-special period, and even if the variation pattern judgment table in which the judgment value is assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the set values becomes larger good. As a result, during the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of execution of normal reach than during the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that it is possible to motivate the player to play the game during the special period. It is possible to increase the game interest.

In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values. For example, in the case of the specific setting value, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set such that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this manner, within a range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the judgment value of the production judgment table is assigned so that the setting suggestion production can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this manner, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this manner, within the range where the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to setting suggesting effects, and arbitrary effects may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the effect control microcomputer 120 is activated, and the CPU 131 executes the effect control main process. A program for executing the effect control main process may be stored in advance in one or both of the internal ROM 132 and the external ROM 121 . Thus, part or all of the program for executing the effect control main process may be stored in advance in the internal ROM 132 or the external ROM 121 .

FIG. 7A is a flow chart showing an example of an effect control main process executed by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. FIG. In the effect control main process, an initialization process is executed (step S21). In the initialization process of step S21, one or both of the external RAM 122 and the internal RAM 133 are cleared, various initial values are set, and register settings of the timer circuit 135 are initialized. Following the initialization process, an initial operation control process is executed (step S22). In the initial motion control process of step S22, control for initial motion of the movable member for presentation, such as control to return the movable member for presentation to the initial position by driving the motor for presentation 60 and control for confirming the operation, is executed. . After the initial operation control process, power-on information processing is executed (step S23). In the power-on information processing in step S23, a process of storing log information including the date and time of power-on may be executed. Data representing the log information is written and stored as backup data in log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board . The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 transmits a control signal corresponding to the backup command for power-on to the backup memory board 14 via the serial communication circuit 137 . In the backup memory board 14, in response to the backup command indicated by the control signal received by the memory controller 200 via the serial communication circuit 202, the date and time information obtained from the RTC 201 is used to write the log information including the power-on date and time. Processing should be executed. In the power-on information processing in step S23, backup restoration processing may be executed to restore settings and controls based on the log information stored in the log area.

After the power-on information processing, an interrupt initial setting process is executed (step S24). In the interrupt initial setting process of step S24, it is sufficient if the priority of interrupts controlled by the interrupt controller 136 can be initialized. The priority of interrupts controlled by interrupt controller 136 may be set based on interrupt priority data stored in advance in a program management area or the like provided in one or both of external ROM 121 and internal ROM 132 . For example, the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the effect control timer interrupt, and the effect control timer interrupt has a higher priority than the V sync interrupt. should be set. Then, after setting the interrupt permission (step S25), the loop processing is entered.

FIG. 7B shows a setting example of processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 120. FIG. The processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 120 may be determined in advance based on the specifications of the effect control microcomputer 120 together with the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller 136 . As an example, the processing when a CPU exception event occurs has the highest priority, followed by VDP error interrupt processing. It suffices if the processing priority is set in advance so that the priority of . Note that the VDP error interrupt process may be executed based on the occurrence of an interrupt factor controllable by the interrupt controller 136 . In this case, for example, the priority of the interrupt may be set by the interrupt initial setting process in step S24 so that the VDP error interrupt has the highest priority. The CPU exception event occurrence process is a process that is executed when an exception event due to an internal state abnormality or the like occurs in the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 . A CPU 131 exception may occur when decoding an undefined instruction that is not defined within the instruction set. CPU 131 exceptions may occur when performing invalid operations such as division by zero or overflow. A CPU 131 exception may occur when a storage protection violation occurs in virtual memory. An exception event of the CPU 131 may occur in the case of a TLB (Translation Lookaside Buffer) miss that causes an error in translation from a virtual address to a physical address. The VDP error interrupt process is a process that is executed when an error interrupt request occurs due to an abnormality in the internal state of the VDP 140 of the effect control microcomputer 120 . The VDP 140 error interrupt request may occur in response to VDP 140 exception events, as in the case of the CPU 131 . In addition, the error interrupt request of the VDP 140 may occur when there is a setting error in the clock signal (dot clock) used for display control of the image display device 5 . An error interrupt request for the VDP 140 may occur when there is an abnormality in decoding moving image data. The VDP 140 error interrupt request may occur when there is an audio data decoding error. A VDP 140 error interrupt request may occur in response to a system reset in VDP 140 . In this way, the CPU exception event processing is executed when an exception event of the CPU 131 occurs. The VDP error interrupt process is executed when an error interrupt request for the VDP 140 occurs. Therefore, when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the CPU 131 is established, the CPU exception event occurrence process is executed. When an event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the VDP 140 is satisfied, VDP error interrupt processing is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing and the VDP error interrupt processing can be executed when an event occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the control device or processing device such as the CPU 131 or VDP 140 is established.

FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a CPU exception event occurs. In the CPU exception event occurrence processing, first, exception preprocessing is executed (step S41). In the exception pre-processing of step S41, control information for instruction code execution is saved in a predetermined area (such as a stack area) of the internal RAM 133, for example. The control information for instruction code execution may include a stored value of a program counter (PC) and a value of a program status word (PSW). Following the exceptional preprocessing, an exceptional backup process is executed (step S42). In the exceptional backup process in step S42, a process of storing log information including exceptional event information is executed. In this case, a control signal corresponding to the backup command for exception event occurrence is sent to the backup memory board 14 . The backup instruction for when an exceptional event occurs may include exceptional event information that indicates an exceptional event that has occurred in the CPU 131 so as to be identifiable. The exception event information may identifiably indicate the type of exception event. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives the backup command for exception event occurrence, the date and time information obtained from the RTC 201 may be used to write the log information including the exception event information.

After the exceptional backup process, other exceptional processes are executed (step S43). In step S43, for example, the vector table may be accessed and an exception handling routine may be started by jumping to the acquired exception handler address. At this time, the values stored in internal registers (such as general-purpose registers) of the CPU 131 may be saved. If the exception event could be resolved by the exception handling routine, or if the exception event could not be resolved and a reset occurred, a backup process similar to step S42 is executed, and if the exception event was resolved or could not be resolved, It may be possible to store the log information in the case where there is not. When the exception handling is finished, the exception post-treatment is executed (step S44), and the CPU exception event occurrence handling is finished. In the post-exception processing of step S44, the values stored in the internal registers (general-purpose registers, etc.) of the CPU 131 are restored, and the control information for executing the instruction code is restored. Just do it.

FIG. 8B is a flowchart showing an example of VDP error interrupt processing. In the VDP error interrupt process, first, preprocessing for error interrupt is executed (step S51). In the error interrupt pre-processing of step S51, for example, the control information for executing the instruction code is saved in a predetermined area (such as a stack area) of the internal RAM 133 . Following the error interrupt preprocessing, error interrupt backup processing is executed (step S52). In the error interrupt backup process of step S52, a process of storing log information including VDP error information is executed. In this case, a control signal corresponding to the backup command for when a VDP error occurs is transmitted to the backup memory board 14 . The backup command for when a VDP error occurs may include VDP error information that identifiably indicates an error that has occurred in the VDP 140 . The VDP error information may identifiably indicate the type of VDP error. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives a backup command when a VDP error occurs, the date and time information obtained from the RTC 201 may be used to write log information including VDP error information.

After the error interrupt backup process, another error interrupt process is executed (step S53). In step S53, it is possible to branch to the interrupt processing routine by jumping to the acquired interrupt handler address according to the interrupt factor corresponding to the VDP error, for example. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the CPU 131 may be saved. If the VDP 140 can autonomously execute recovery processing from an internal error, it may wait until it receives a notification of the completion of recovery or a notification of the occurrence of a reset due to inability to recover. Upon receipt of these notifications, backup processing similar to that of step S52 may be executed to store log information when the VDP 140 recovers from the error state or cannot recover. When the error interrupt process ends, the error interrupt post-process is executed (step S54), and the VDP error interrupt process ends. In the error interrupt post-processing of step S54, the values stored in the internal registers (general-purpose registers, etc.) of the CPU 131 are restored, and the control information for executing the instruction code is restored, so that the processing before the VDP error occurred can be restored. And it is sufficient.

The CPU exception event occurrence processing includes exception backup processing in step S42. The VDP error interrupt processing includes error interrupt backup processing in step S52. In the exception backup process in step S42, data including exception event information about the CPU 131 among the plurality of electronic components is stored in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 as backup data indicating log information. A write operation is performed to write to the area. In the error interrupt backup process in step S52, data including VDP error information regarding the VDP 140 among the plurality of electronic components is stored in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 as backup data indicating log information. A write process is executed to write to the log area. The CPU exception event occurrence process is executed when an exception event occurs in the CPU 131 assuming that an event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the CPU 131 is satisfied. The VDP error interrupt process is executed when an error interrupt request for the VDP 140 is generated, assuming that an event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the VDP 140 is satisfied. In this way, when an event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the control device or processing device, such as the CPU 131 or the VDP 140, is satisfied, information about a plurality of electronic components is written to a storage area such as a log area. A write process can be performed for storage.

After setting the interrupt permission by step S25 of the effect control main processing, a timeout occurs in a predetermined channel of the timer circuit 135 every predetermined time (such as 2 milliseconds), and the interrupt controller 136 to the CPU 131 Then, an interrupt request signal corresponding to the timer interrupt for effect control is output. CPU131 which received this interruption request signal and accepted an interruption request starts execution of timer interruption processing for production control.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect control timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 131 . In the effect control timer interrupt process, a command analysis process is executed (step S71). In the command analysis process of step S71, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect Setting and control corresponding to the control command are performed. Following the command analysis process, an effect control process process is executed (step S72). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the effect LED 61, the effect motor 60 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. In addition, regarding the control contents of the performance operation using various performance devices, various judgments related to performance are performed according to the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11, or the elapsed time or detection result according to the progress of the game or performance. Decisions, settings, etc. are made.

After the production control process, the production random number update process is executed (step S73). In the effect random number update process of step S73, at least part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. After the effect random number update process, effect mode change process is executed (step S74). For example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled in three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and depending on which effect mode is being controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 It is only necessary that the types of characters appearing in the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are different. The control to change from the current production mode to a different production mode may be performed when the production mode change condition is satisfied. For example, based on the date and time information acquired from the RTC provided in the timer circuit 135, when a specific date or time comes, the effect mode change condition may be established and the effect mode may be changed. Alternatively, the lottery process using the random number for effect may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed when the effect mode change condition is satisfied according to the determination result.

An error notification process is executed following the effect mode change process (step S75). In the error notification process of step S75, control for notifying various errors that have occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. Notification by such control may include left-hand driving notification and full-tank notification. The left-handed notification is a notification that prompts the player to perform a left-handed operation based on, for example, the total number of times the game ball has passed through a passage gate provided in the right area of the game area. The left-handed notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as "Aim left!" It may also include occasional notifications, or a combination of some or all of these. The full tank notification is a notification that, when the full tank state of the surplus ball storage tray (lower tray) is detected, urges the player to eliminate the full tank state based on the elapsed time that the full tank state has continued. . The full tank notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as "The lower tray is full!" or a combination of some or all of these may be included. In addition, the error notification process, in response to the occurrence of an error specified by the game control error specification command transmitted from the main board 11, by display, lighting or light emission, sound output, or a combination of some or all of these , and includes control for notifying various errors that have occurred. Alternatively, regardless of the game control error designation command, according to the processing result of the CPU 131, when it is determined that an error related to electronic parts including the effect device has occurred, display, lighting or light emission, sound output, or By combining some or all of these, control may be performed to notify various errors that have occurred.

After the error notification process, the maintenance mode process is executed (step S76). In the maintenance mode process of step S76, control is performed to enable display of the maintenance history screen and setting change/confirmation history screen. On the maintenance history screen, for example, when a setting confirmation display corresponding to the setting confirmation state or a maintenance mode menu screen is being displayed, detection of an operation that is an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the staff of the game hall is performed. Based on the result, it becomes possible to display when it is determined that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed. When displaying the maintenance history screen, all log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. FIG. The image display device 5 displays a maintenance history screen including the read log information as history information. The setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed when it is determined that a setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed, based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, which is an operation by the game hall attendant. Become. When the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, all setting change and setting confirmation log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. FIG. The image display device 5 displays a setting change/confirmation history screen including log information of the read setting change and setting confirmation as history information. Note that the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed based on the detection result of the operation performed by the person in charge of the pachinko game machine 1 manufacturer, unlike the person in charge of the game hall. good. The maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen are screens that the player of the pachinko machine 1 cannot see while playing the game. Just do it.

After the maintenance mode process, the current time setting process is executed (step S77). In the current time setting process of step S77, control for setting the current date and current time is performed. In this case, it is possible to input the setting information of the current date and current time based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the staff of the game arcade. For example, an hour signal indicating the hour, a minute signal indicating the minute, a second signal indicating the second, a year signal indicating the year, a month signal indicating the month, a day signal indicating the day, and a day of the week signal indicating the day of the week are set and inputted. The CPU 131 receives them sequentially. By updating the information stored in the RTC in the timer circuit 135 according to these received signals, it is sufficient to change the setting of the current date and the current time measured by the RTC of the timer circuit 135 . By updating the information stored in the RTC 201 provided on the backup memory board 14 according to the input setting information, the setting of the current date and current items measured by the RTC 201 may be changed. When the current time setting process ends, the date and time information storage process is executed (step S78). In the date/time information storage process of step S78, control is performed to store the date/time information in a temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 at a predetermined cycle (every 100 milliseconds, etc.). The date and time information stored in the temporary area may be stored as log information indicating the date and time of power failure when receiving a RAM clear notification command or power failure restoration designation command from the main board 11 . And after performing backup processing during production|presentation control (step S79), the timer interruption process for production|presentation control is complete|finished. In the backup process during effect control in step S79, backup data indicating various types of log information is stored in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 when a preset backup condition is satisfied. A storage process is performed to store and store. In this case, the log information to be stored may be information including some or all of the operation history, setting history, error history, etc. regarding a plurality of electronic components used for games and effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, the log information may include date and time information indicating the date and time when it was stored.

FIG. 10 shows an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted for the game from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 to the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 . In the following, the subscript H indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command receivable by the effect control microcomputer 120 has a 2-byte structure, the first byte being MODE data representing the command classification, and the second byte being EXT data representing the command type. The leading bit (bit 7) of the upper data (MODE data) of the effect control command is always set to "1", and the leading bit (bit 7) of the lower data (EXT data) of the effect control command is always set to "0". be done. It should be noted that the effect control command is not limited to a 2-byte configuration, and a control command configured with, for example, 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used. The performance control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 as the game progresses. The effect control microcomputer 120 receives one of the effect control commands as the game progresses. Thus, the effect control command is a game effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 to the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 in accordance with the control relating to the progress of the game. is.

The variation start command 80XXH designates the start of variation for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which are a plurality of special symbols. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the variation start command, may be 01H at the start of variation of the first special symbol, and 02H at the start of variation of the second special symbol, for example. The variation pattern designation command 81XXH designates the variation pattern of the decoration design to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the variation pattern designation command, indicates a value corresponding to the variation pattern. The display result designation command 8CXXH designates the display result of variable display. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the display result specifying command, indicates a value corresponding to the display result of the variable display. The symbol confirmation command 8F00H designates to end the variation of symbols. The RAM clear notification command 9000H notifies that the memory contents of the RAM 102 are cleared due to the initialization in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on and the power supply is started. The setting change start command 9100H designates the start of a setting change state in which setting values can be changed when power supply is started by power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The power failure recovery specification command 9200H specifies execution of power failure recovery processing corresponding to power failure recovery. The setting change end command 93XXH designates the end of the setting change state. In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. For example, command 9300H specifies that the setting value is set to "1", command 9301H specifies that the setting value is set to "2", and command 9302H specifies that the setting value is set to "3". Specifies that it is set. Alternatively, only the command 9300H with EXT data of 00H may be prepared as the setting change end command, and the command 9300H may specify the end of the setting change state regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, a set value designation command for designating a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared as an effect control command different from the setting change end command. In addition to the case where the setting value designation command is transmitted along with the transmission of the setting change end command, for example, along with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation start and correspondence in each round of the special game may be sent as In addition, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times, such as every 10 times of variable start in the special game. Instead of or in addition to these, a setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the winning start designation command or the winning end designation command. A set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

The setting confirmation start command 9400H designates the start of a setting confirmation state in which setting values can be confirmed when power supply is started by power-on in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The setting confirmation end command 9401H designates the end of the setting confirmation state. The game state designation command 95XXH designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state, time saving state) The second game state designation command corresponding to . The game control error specification command 96XXH specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) related to game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the game control error designation command, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. , the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) may be notified by error notification processing. The customer waiting demonstration designation command 9F00H designates the display of a customer waiting demonstration screen (demonstration screen display) by displaying an effect image corresponding to the stoppage of the progress of the game in the customer waiting state. The hit start specifying command A0XXH specifies display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The large winning opening open specifying command A1XXH specifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The post-opening of the big winning opening designation command A2XXH designates a period in which the big winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The hit end designation command A3XXH designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big win game state or the small win game state. The background designation command B0XXH designates the display state of the background screen according to the game state or the like. The first reserved memory number designation command C1XXH designates the first reserved memory number. The first reserved memory number is the reserved number of variable display corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A among the reserved memory numbers, and is, for example, any value of "0" to "4". The second reserved memory number designation command C2XXH designates the second reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number is a variable display reserved number corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B among the reserved memory numbers, and is, for example, any value of "0" to "4". Winning determination result specification command C3XXH specifies the winning determination result. The winning determination result is when the first starting opening switch 22A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting opening opening, or when the second starting opening switch 22B has passed (entered) the second starting opening opening. When a ball is detected, numerical data indicating a game random number extracted from, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is used to determine whether or not the variable display result is a "jackpot". and the results of determining the fluctuation pattern. That is, before determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the winning determination result is the result of determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state, or whether it becomes a specific variation pattern. The result of determining whether or not is shown.

FIG. 11 shows an example of contents of a production control command that is a test command that the production control microcomputer 120 of the production control board 12 can receive. The effect control command, which is a test command, also has a 2-byte configuration, like the game effect control command. The performance control command, which is a test command, has upper data (MODE data) set to any of F0H to F3H. These high-order data (MODE data) are values that are not used in game effect control commands, and may be prepared in advance as dedicated commands for performing various inspections. Note that the test command is not limited to a 2-byte configuration, and a control command configured with, for example, 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used. The test command is not included in the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 as the game progresses. A test command is transmitted from an inspection device as an external device connected via a signal wiring to, for example, the connectors 150 and 156 or the inspection connection portion 203 provided on the backup memory board 14, and the effect control board 12 Based on the reception of the effect control microcomputer 120, it becomes possible to execute inspection processing corresponding to the received command. In this way, the effect control command serving as a test command is a game effect transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 to the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 as the game progresses. Unlike the control command, it is an effect control command for inspection that enables execution of inspection processing for performing various inspections.

The black screen display command F000H causes the image display device 5 to display a test black screen. The test black screen is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is black. The ROM check screen command F005H displays on the screen of the image display device 5 execution results and version information of various ROM inspection processes such as the external ROM 62AK120. The red display command F020H causes the image display device 5 to display a red screen, which is a screen for display inspection whose display color is red. The green display command F021H causes the image display device 5 to display a green screen, which is a screen for display inspection whose display color is green. The blue display command F022H causes the image display device 5 to display a blue screen, which is a screen for display inspection whose display color is blue. The white display command F023H causes the image display device 5 to display a white screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is white. The black display command F024H causes the image display device 5 to display a black screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is black. The RTC value type specification command F1XXH specifies the type of RTC value. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the RTC value type designation command, indicates values corresponding to the type of RTC value, such as year, month, date, day of the week, hour, minute, and second. The RTC value setting command F2XXH sets specific contents and values for the type of RTC value specified by the RTC value type specifying command F1XXH. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the RTC value setting command, indicates values corresponding to specific numerical values for year, month, day, hour, minute, and second, and corresponds to days of the week from Sunday to Saturday. value.

The check process designation command F3XXH designates execution of various check processes as inspection processes. For example, XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of a command specifying check processing, may indicate a unique value different between one check processing and another check processing, or indicate a value common to multiple types of check processing. If there is a case, it is good. The check process specification command F3XXH constitutes a plurality of test commands, and when received in a predetermined order as a combination of a plurality of test commands, if it is possible to execute various check processes that become inspection processes. good. In addition, as the order of receiving a plurality of test commands predetermined corresponding to various check processing, etc., which is inspection processing, a plurality of types of orders are predetermined, and the order in which the combinations of the plurality of test commands are received is determined in advance. It is sufficient if it is possible to execute different inspection processes depending on the type.

FIG. 12 shows a setting example of the reception order of test commands and the processing to be executed according to the reception order list. Backup clear, external RAM check (short), external RAM check (long), and backup inspection are prepared in advance as processes that can be executed by combining a plurality of test commands. FIG. 12(A) shows the order of receiving a combination of a plurality of test commands when executing backup clear processing. FIG. 12B shows the order of receiving a combination of a plurality of test commands when executing external RAM check (short) processing. FIG. 12C shows the order of receiving a combination of a plurality of test commands when executing external RAM check (long) processing. FIG. 12D shows the order in which combinations of multiple test commands are received when performing backup inspection processing. In the receiving order shown in FIGS. 12A to 12D, a combination of a plurality of test commands is received in order from top to bottom, and when all the receiving orders match, the corresponding processing is executed.

The backup clear process is a process for initializing the storage contents of backup data. The backup data is, for example, data stored in log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14, and indicates various types of log information. The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes for checking whether or not data can be appropriately written to and read from the storage area of the external RAM 122 . The external RAM check (short) process is a process that can be executed in a shorter time than the external RAM check (long) process, and may include processing contents that are simpler than the external RAM check (long) process. . Backup inspection processing is inspection processing that is executed based on the storage contents of backup data. In this case, the backup data read from the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 may be output to an inspection device as an external device.

The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes that enable the state of an electronic component such as the external RAM 122 to be inspected. Backup inspection processing is inspection processing that enables confirmation of information on various electronic components based on the storage contents of backup data indicating log information. In this way, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 can execute an inspection process that enables inspection or confirmation of the state of electronic components by combining a plurality of test commands. A combination of a plurality of test commands according to the order of reception is composed of commands specifying check processing, etc., in which the upper data (MODE data) of the received commands are all F3H. In this way, the combination of a plurality of test commands received for executing the inspection process is configured as a combination of production control commands for inspection that are different from the production control commands for games received as the game progresses. . Therefore, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic parts is not executed based on the reception of the game effect control command. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection processing for inspecting the state of the electronic parts from being erroneously executed based on the performance control command for the game received as the game progresses, and to carry out an appropriate inspection. can be done. In addition, for example, since it reduces the possibility that the inspection process is erroneously executed while the game is in progress, it prevents troubles caused by misunderstanding that the gaming machine has been damaged due to the erroneous execution of the inspection process. It is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by an interruption and improve the reliability of inspection processing.

A combination of a plurality of test commands received when performing backup clear processing includes a command that is F311H among commands specifying check processing and the like. A combination of a plurality of test commands received when executing an external RAM check (short) process includes a command that is F312H among commands specifying check process and the like. A combination of a plurality of test commands received when executing the external RAM check (long) process includes a command that is F313H among the commands specifying the check process and the like. A combination of a plurality of test commands received when executing the backup inspection process includes a command F314H among commands specifying check process and the like. None of these commands are included in the combination of multiple test commands received when executing other processes. In this way, a combination of test commands received to perform a particular inspection process may be a unique test command not included in a combination of test commands received to perform other inspection processes. may contain. For example, among the specified commands for check processing, commands such as F303H and F304H are used to execute backup clear processing, external RAM clear (short) processing, external RAM clear (long) processing, and backup inspection processing. is also included in the combination of multiple test commands received. In this way, a combination of test commands received to perform a particular inspection process includes common test commands that are also included in a combination of test commands received to perform other inspection processes. You can stay. Also, for example, among commands specifying check processing, a command of F37FH is a test command that is received last in a combination of a plurality of test commands to be received, regardless of which processing is to be executed. In this way, the test command received last in the combination of test commands received to perform a particular inspection process is the last test command received in the combination of test commands received to perform another inspection process. It may be a command common to the received test command. Note that the first test command received in a combination of a plurality of test commands is not limited to a unique command. The part test command may be a unique command. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the last received test command in a combination of a plurality of test commands is a common command. The test command for each unit may be a common command. A combination of a plurality of test commands received for executing the inspection process may be configured as a combination of a larger number of commands than the game effect control commands received as the game progresses. In this case, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic parts is not executed with the number of effect control commands received for the game. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection processing for inspecting the state of the electronic parts from being erroneously executed based on the performance control command for the game received as the game progresses, and to carry out an appropriate inspection. can be done. In addition, for example, since it reduces the possibility that the inspection process is erroneously executed while the game is in progress, it prevents troubles caused by misunderstanding that the gaming machine has been damaged due to the erroneous execution of the inspection process. It is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by an interruption and improve the reliability of inspection processing. As a combination of multiple test commands, there are multiple types of orders for receiving the test commands. Then, as inspection processing, such as external RAM check (short) processing, external RAM check (long) processing, and backup inspection processing, different processing can be executed according to the type of order in which combinations of a plurality of test commands are received. . Moreover, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component differs depending on the combination of the plurality of test commands. As a result, various inspection processes for inspecting the state of electronic components can be executed, and appropriate inspection can be performed.

In the effect control backup process executed in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not a preset backup condition has been established. Then, when it is determined that the backup condition is met, a backup process is executed for storing and storing the data to be backed up according to the backup condition that has been met. As for the backup condition, a plurality of different conditions may be set according to occurrence of events including various changes and settings in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . A backup control table indicating a plurality of backup conditions may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (such as a program management area) provided in one or both of the external ROM 121 and internal ROM 132, for example. The data to be backed up may include different data depending on the backup conditions. Alternatively, the backup target data may include data common to multiple backup conditions. Data to be backed up indicating log information including date and time information may be stored when any of the backup conditions are met. A batch backup and a divided backup may be prepared as backup methods for storing data to be backed up. In the case of batch backup, data to be backed up by one backup is stored in interrupt processing based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt for effect control. In the case of split backup, data to be backed up by one backup is stored in interrupt processing based on multiple occurrences of timer interrupts for effect control.

The backup process for storing and storing the data to be backed up according to the backup conditions is performed each time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, and when the backup conditions are met in the effect control backup process of step S79. It may be executable, or may be collectively executable when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the backup process is collectively executed at the time of power failure, when it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied in the backup process during the effect control, the log information including the date and time information is stored in a predetermined area of the external RAM 122, for example. Store target data.

FIG. 13 shows a setting example of the backup control table 120T that provides a plurality of backup conditions and the like. The backup control table 120T is configured to be able to set backup conditions, backup method, division method, number of storage area bits, multiplicity, and verification method for each data to be backed up indicating the content of log information. When the backup method is split backup, it is possible to specify "automatic", "every 100 KB", etc. as the split method. The division method is a method or technique for dividing the backup target data when performing divided backup, and it is sufficient if the number of times of division and the data volume at the time of division can be specified. For example, when the division method is "automatic", the number of divisions is determined according to the data capacity of the backup target data each time the backup process is executed. Alternatively, depending on the processing load on the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14, the number of divisions and the data capacity at the time of division may be determined. The number of storage area bits is a processing unit of stored data in a log area, which is a storage area for storing log information, in the backup data memories 210A to 210D provided on the backup memory board 14, and in this example, 8 bits. "8" or "3" indicating 3 bits can be specified. The degree of multiplicity is the degree of mirroring in which data to be backed up that indicates the same log information is stored in a plurality of different log areas in an overlapping and distributed manner. You can specify the number of times. For example, when the multiplicity is "1", the data to be backed up indicating the same log information is stored and backed up only once without performing mirroring. When the multiplicity is "2", mirroring is performed with the number of times of storage being two, and backup target data indicating the same log information is stored twice in different storage areas and backed up. When the multiplicity is "3", mirroring is performed with a storage count of 3, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored 3 times in different storage areas and backed up. By increasing the degree of multiplicity, redundancy (availability) can be improved and the reliability of stored data can be enhanced.

The verification method that can be set for each data to be backed up is a method to verify whether or not the backup processing, which is the storage processing of the data to be backed up, was performed correctly. It is possible. If the verification method is error detection, when the data to be backed up is read from the log area, arbitrary error detection processing using parity, checksum, hash value, etc. is executed to verify the correctness of the stored data. I wish I could. If the verification method is error detection and majority vote, along with error detection processing using parity, checksum, hash value, etc., in multiple log areas where backup target data that is multiplexed by mirroring and shows the same log information is stored Compare stored data. As a result of this comparison, if the stored contents match in a predetermined number of log areas out of the plurality of log areas, it is determined that the backup processing has been correctly performed, and the correctness of the stored data can be verified. For example, if parity, checksum, or hash values calculated from stored data in multiple log areas match, it can be determined that backup processing has been correctly performed for each log area. If the parity, checksum or hash value calculated from the stored data in multiple log areas do not match, if the number of log areas for which the same parity, checksum or hash value is calculated is more than half, It is sufficient to judge that the backup process has been correctly performed for the log area (judgment by majority vote). The "predetermined number of log areas", which is the condition for judging that the backup process has been performed correctly, is not limited to the majority of the log areas, and is a preset fixed value (for example, "2") regardless of multiplicity. Alternatively, it may be a variable value determined according to the degree of multiplicity, backup method, division method, or the like. Instead of making a decision based on a majority vote, it may be determined that the backup process has been correctly performed when the execution result of the error detection process becomes normal for the first time.

Data to be backed up includes system data, effect control error data, player history data, received command data, set value change time data, power saving setting data, current time change data, power off time data, store name setting data, effect output amount. data, including production history data. It should be noted that the data to be backed up may include some of these. System data should just contain the data for production|presentation control memorize|stored in the predetermined area|region (data holding area for production|presentation control etc.) provided in external RAM122 or internal RAM133. Production control error data is data indicating an error that occurred during execution of production control. The player history data is data relating to the player acquired by the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The received command data is data indicating the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 . The set value change time data is data indicating the date and time when the set value was changed. The setting value change time data may include data indicating the date and time when the setting value was confirmed, or the setting value confirmation time data may be generated separately from the setting value change time data. The power saving setting data is data related to power saving control that can be set by the staff of the game arcade. The setting of the power saving control can be performed, for example, by rotating the knob of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and when the power saving function setting screen is displayed on the image display device 5, the power saving function can be set. It is sufficient if the presence/absence and type (power saving mode) of the function can be changed. Alternatively, when a test command for power saving setting is input, a power saving function setting screen may be displayed on the image display device 5 so that the presence or absence of the power saving function and the function (power saving mode) can be changed. The current time change data is data indicating that the setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC has been changed. The setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC may be one or both of the setting of the RTC provided in the timer circuit 135 of the performance control microcomputer 120 and the setting of the RTC 201 provided on the backup memory board 14. Just do it. The power-off time data is data indicating the date and time when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The store name setting data is data indicating the setting of a store name that can be set by a game hall staff member or the like. The performance output amount data is data indicating the setting of the output amount such as the sound volume and the light emission amount that can be set by the player or the like. The effect history data is data indicating the history of effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, the number of rotations indicating the number of times the variable display is executed counted from a specific timing, the number of types of jackpots indicating the number of jackpots counted for each type of jackpot, the number of consecutive wins indicating the number of jackpots that occurred without being controlled in the normal state, the player Arbitrary information according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 and the progress of control, such as the character selection content of the effect image set by It suffices if the data indicating is capable of being stored as backup target data.

The backup conditions that can be set for each data to be backed up may be conditions for events such as setting, control, determination, and detection in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can occur as a game or performance progresses. In the production control backup process executed in step S79 of the production control timer interrupt process, for example, the CPU131 and VDP140 of the production control microcomputer 120, according to the processing results by the control device and the processing device, was set in advance It suffices to determine whether any of the backup conditions are met. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S75, by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 11, or by determining various detection results, the production device If an error related to the included electronic components occurs, control is performed to notify the error. In this case, in the effect control backup process, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is established, and effect control error data is created. In this way, when it is determined that the backup condition is established in the backup process during effect control, a control signal corresponding to the backup command for backup during effect control is transmitted to the backup memory board 14 . The backup command for backup during effect control should just contain backup object data. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives a backup command for backup during effect control, the date and time information acquired from the RTC 201 may be used to write log information including data to be backed up. Storing error information about electronic components including the effect device facilitates identification of defects and improvement of performance.

The effect control backup process is executed in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process based on the occurrence of the effect control timer interrupt. Then, as a case where an event occurrence condition corresponding to a processing result by a control device or a processing device such as the CPU 131 or VDP 140 is met, a case where a backup condition set for each backup target data relating to a plurality of electronic components including a performance device is met is met. , a backup process for storing the data to be backed up is executed. In this way, when an event occurrence condition relating to a plurality of electronic components is satisfied, when an event occurrence condition corresponding to the processing result of a control device or a processing device such as the CPU 131 or VDP 140 is satisfied, a log area or the like is stored. A write process for writing and storing information about a plurality of electronic components can be performed on the area.

The backup conditions that can be set for each data to be backed up may include write conditions that differ from event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. For example, for player history data, a backup condition is satisfied when data relating to a player is updated, regardless of whether or not events corresponding to a plurality of electronic components have occurred. As for the received command data, a backup condition may be established when the performance control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is received even when an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components does not occur. The store name setting data satisfies a backup condition when setting the name of the store corresponding to the game arcade, regardless of whether or not events corresponding to the plurality of electronic components have occurred. The system data is stored regardless of whether or not the backup condition is met when the data is updated due to the occurrence of events related to multiple electronic components, and whether or not events related to multiple electronic components have occurred. In some cases, the backup condition is satisfied at the time of data update. In this way, backup processing for storing data to be backed up is executed even when a backup condition is satisfied as a write condition that is different from an event occurrence condition corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. When a write condition different from such an occurrence condition is met, a write process for writing and storing game-related information different from information on a plurality of electronic components in a storage area such as a log area. can be executed. In the event that an event occurs due to the malfunction of the electronic parts, the backup data including the game-related information is stored, so that it is possible to easily identify the relationship between the progress of the game or performance and the malfunction of the electronic parts. Therefore, the situation of the pachinko game machine 1 can be easily grasped.

When the data to be backed up is the performance control error data, the backup condition is not limited to the backup condition only when the error occurs, and the backup condition including the error recovery may be set. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S75, by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 11, or by determining various detection results, the production device If an error related to the included electronic components occurs, control is performed to report the error. In this case, in the effect control backup process, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is established, and effect control error data is created. After that, when the error is no longer detected for the electronic component subject to the error notification, it is determined that the error has been recovered. At the time of error recovery by such determination, it may be determined that the backup condition is established in the backup process during effect control, and effect control error recovery data may be created. The performance control error recovery data created in this manner is included in a backup command for backup during performance control and transmitted to the backup memory board 14 in the same manner as the performance control error data. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives a backup command for backup during effect control, the date and time information acquired from the RTC 201 may be used to perform the writing process of log information including backup target data. In addition to performance control error data, performance control error recovery data can also be stored as backup data, thereby storing the history of error occurrence and recovery related to performance control to enable post facto verification, and the pachinko game machine 1. status can be easily grasped.

In the power-on information processing in step S23 of the effect control main process, a backup restoration process for restoring settings and controls based on the log information stored in the log area may be executed. In the backup recovery process, verification may be performed using a verification method according to the data to be backed up, and it may be determined whether or not the stored data is normal. For example, if the verification method is error detection and majority vote, if the execution result of error detection processing is normal in a predetermined number of log areas among a plurality of log areas in which data to be backed up showing the same log information is stored, It is determined that the stored data is normal. Thus, if the stored data is normal, data recovery processing is performed using the stored data in the log area. On the other hand, if the stored data is not normal, initial value setting is performed using initial data different from the stored data in the log area. The initial data is stored in one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, for example, and may be data used when the initialization process is executed in step S21 of the game control main process. As a result, even if the data to be backed up cannot be stored correctly, the initial value setting using the initial data can be performed in response to the recovery from the power failure. Special data corresponding to the case where the stored data is not normal may be used instead of the initial data. Different from the initial data, the special data may be any data suitable for restoring settings and control. Whether to use the initial data or the special data may be differentiated according to the data to be backed up for which it is determined that the stored data is not normal. For example, if the data to be backed up is system data, data recovery using special data is performed when it is determined that the stored data is not normal. On the other hand, if the data to be backed up is the effect output amount data, the data recovery is performed using the initial data when it is determined that the stored data is not normal. The setting of whether to use the initial data or the special data is made in advance based on the update frequency of the backup target data, the update data amount, the importance of the data, the target parts, the target control, a combination of some or all of these, etc. It should be decided. It should be noted that the backup recovery process may be made executable when the preset data recovery condition is satisfied in the backup process during effect control. The data recovery condition may be satisfied, for example, when a power failure recovery designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received.

In the effect control backup process, it may be determined whether or not the backup memory board 14 is connected to the effect control board 12 . In this case, the voltage value at terminal TM02 of connector 154 may be determined. Depending on the determination result of the connection state, whether or not to execute the storage process may be changed, and the storage process with different contents may be executed. For example, when the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the performance control board 12, the storage process of storing the log information in the log area is not executed. In this manner, a limitation may be provided as a limit that the memory processing is not executed in the range where the preset limitation condition that the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the performance control board 12 is satisfied. On the other hand, as long as the memory processing can be executed in a range where the restriction condition that the backup memory board 14 is connected to the effect control board 12 is not established. As storage processing of different contents, when the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the effect control board 12, a predetermined area of the external RAM 122 is used as a log area to store and store backup data showing various log information. Processing may be performed. In this case, compared to the case where the backup memory board 14 is connected to the performance control board 12, the data capacity to be stored as the backup target data may be reduced. For example, performance control error data and received command data are data to be backed up, and when a backup condition is met, a storage process is executed to store log information. On the other hand, system data and player history data are not data to be backed up. Instead, the storage process for storing the log information may not be executed even if the backup condition is met. In this way, in the range where the preset limit condition that the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the effect control board 12 is satisfied, a limit is provided as a limit to reduce the data capacity to be stored by the storage process. may On the other hand, in the range where the limiting condition that the backup memory board 14 is connected to the performance control board 12 is not established, the data capacity to be stored by the storage processing is not reduced, and the backup corresponding to all the backup conditions is performed. It is sufficient to store and store the target data. It is not limited to memory processing, and any processing or control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be limited as a limit that a specific processing or control is not executed within a range where a preset limit condition is satisfied. Alternatively, a limit may be provided as a limit such that the amount of processing or the amount of control is reduced compared to a range in which the limit condition is not established.

14 and 15 show specific examples of displaying the maintenance history screen. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in step S5 of the game control main process, and when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. When this setting confirmation start command is received, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 is, for example, when the maintenance mode process is executed in step S78 of the effect control timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. display during confirmation of settings. For the display during setting confirmation, for example, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Setting confirmation is in progress". The setting-confirming display includes a character display such as "Press the push button to shift to maintenance mode" on the image display device 5. FIG. In this manner, in the setting confirmation display, a display prompting an operation for shifting to the maintenance mode is performed. At this time, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B by the staff of the game arcade or the person in charge of the manufacturer is detected, the image display device 5 displays a maintenance mode menu screen as shown in FIG. Move to maintenance mode. The maintenance mode menu screen displays options of "maintenance history", "setting change/confirmation history", and "current time setting", as well as the current time.

When the option 012IW106 of "maintenance history" is selected on the maintenance mode menu screen, the image display device 5 switches to display a maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 14(C). On the maintenance history screen, date and time and log contents are displayed in association with each other, and are displayed in order so that the latest log information is at the top. Examples include a VDP error indicating that an internal state abnormality has occurred in the VDP 140, an illegal winning error indicating detection of an illegal winning to a winning opening such as the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening, and a count switch. Each log information of switch abnormality error indicating that abnormality of various switches such as 23 was detected, prize ball abnormality error indicating that prize ball abnormality was detected, magnet error indicating that abnormal magnetism was detected, furthermore, probability change not established log information is displayed indicating that the When the maintenance history screen has a plurality of pages, performing a selection operation for the next page moves to the second page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 14(D). In this case, log information of the start of setting change and end of setting change, log information of power failure date and time, power on date and time, and log information of left driving notification and full tank notification are displayed. Further, if there is a next page, performing a selection operation for the next page moves to the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 15(E). At this time, log information indicating the start and end of setting confirmation, log information indicating that the current time was set during maintenance mode during setting confirmation, and log information indicating that the RAM was cleared by initialization processing. Information is displayed. Further, when the next page selection operation is performed, the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 15(F) is shifted to the fourth page. Here, the log information of the RWM abnormality error indicating that some RAM abnormality occurred when the pachinko game machine 1 was turned on, and the log information of the date and time of power failure corresponding to the later date and time and the date and time of power-on are displayed. . Based on these log information, an RWM abnormality error occurred, so the staff of the game hall temporarily stopped the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1, turned on the clear switch, and turned on the power again. It is possible to confirm after the fact that the RAM has been cleared. Further, log information of the CPU exception event indicating that the exception event has occurred in the CPU 131, and log information of the date and time of the power failure and the power-on date and time corresponding to the later date and time are displayed. Since a CPU exception event occurred according to these log information, the game hall staff stopped the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1, but when the power was turned on the next day, the CPU exception event did not occur anymore. This can be confirmed after the fact.

Note that on the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 15E, the log information indicating that the current time has been set indicates an earlier time than the log information indicating that the setting confirmation has started. Log information is displayed. For example, the setting check was started at 09:36:28 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, and the current time was set at 09:36 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018: 16. The reason why the date and time are inconsistent before and after setting the current time is that when the current time is set, the date and time information after setting is read and the log information is recorded. In this example, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information was generated, and the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information was generated even if the date and time are not consistent before and after the current time is set.

In addition to displaying the maintenance history screen, or instead of displaying the maintenance history screen, a two-dimensional barcode may be displayed on the image display device 5 so that log information can be acquired. For example, a photographing device connected to the inspection device is used to photograph the two-dimensional barcode displayed on the image display device 5 . By photographing such a two-dimensional barcode, log information can be provided to the inspection device. In addition, log information may be output using any output method, such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of some or all of these. Any information output, not limited to log information, can be output using any output method such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of some or all of these. I wish I had.

The log information that can be displayed on the maintenance history screen may be all of the log information shown in the backup data, or may be part of the log information shown in the backup data. For example, on the maintenance history screen, it is possible to display log information corresponding to conditions for occurrence of events that can be established according to the internal state of the control device, such as exceptional events of the CPU 131 . Also, on the maintenance history screen, it is possible to display log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions of events that can be established according to the internal state of the processing device, such as an error interrupt request of the VDP 140 . On the maintenance history screen, it is possible to display log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions of specific events that can be established according to the processing results of the CPU 131, such as when an error occurs in the backup process during the effect control, when the time is changed, and when the power is turned on again. is. On the other hand, the maintenance history screen displays log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions of events other than specific events, such as when player history data is updated during backup processing during performance control, when power saving is set, and when decisions are made when setting names. do not. In this way, log information stored as backup data may include log information that is not displayed on the maintenance history screen. Alternatively, log information that is not displayed on the normal maintenance history screen but can be displayed on the special maintenance history screen may be provided. The special maintenance screen may be displayed according to an arbitrary detection result, such as a detection result of an action that becomes a predetermined operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In this case, the operation procedures for the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B are not notified to the staff of the game hall, and may be recognized by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. A special maintenance history screen may be displayed according to arbitrary control and processing without being limited to the detection results. In this manner, a limit may be set such that a specific type of log information among multiple types of log information is not displayed on the maintenance history screen. In the range of log information other than specific types, it is sufficient if it can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Alternatively, in the range of specific types of log information among multiple types of log information, a limit may be set such that the log information can only be displayed on a special maintenance history screen and not displayed on the normal maintenance history screen.

FIG. 16 shows a specific example of a case where a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode. 16(B) in response to the detection of the action of pressing the push button 31B by the game hall staff or manufacturer's person in charge while the setting confirmation display as shown in FIG. 16(A) is being performed. The maintenance mode menu screen as shown in is displayed. Then, the option 012IW107 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected. In this case, the image display device 5 switches to display a setting change/confirmation history screen as shown in FIG. 16(C). On the setting change/confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether it is a setting change or a setting confirmation, and the setting value after change or the setting value that has been confirmed are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed at the top. displayed in order. It should be noted that when the option of "current time setting" is selected while the maintenance mode menu screen is being displayed, the image display device 5 switches to display the current time setting screen. On the current time setting screen, tilting the stick controller 31A left or right selects items such as year, month, date, day of the week, hour, minute, or second, and tilting the stick controller 31A forward or backward selects a number for each item. be done. After the current time setting screen is displayed, the current date and time is set to the date and time currently being displayed when the staff of the game arcade or the person in charge of the manufacturer presses the push button 31B.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 41AK)
FIG. 17 shows an execution example of the backup process for the characteristic portion 41AK. In this case, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, so that the memory write processing unit 41AKM10 and the event information creation processing units 41AKM21 to 41AKM23 It has functions. A predetermined area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 is provided with a writing flag 41AKF1 and a backup data buffer 41AKB1. The backup data buffer 41AKB1 has a plurality of buffer areas including buffer areas 41AKB11 to 41AKB13. The backup data memories 210A to 210C of the backup memory board 14 are provided with backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The backup storage unit 41AKA1 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13 as log areas. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23 as log areas. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33 as log areas.

The event information creation processing unit 41AKM21 creates backup data indicating event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 41AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exception backup process in step S42 of the CPU exception event occurrence process. good. The event information creation processing unit 41AKM22 creates backup data indicating event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the error interrupt backup process in step S52 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Just do it. Occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM23 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the effect control error determination 41AKC3. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process during effect control in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process, and data indicating log information including effect control error data. If it is The backup data created by the event information creation processing units 41AKM21 to 41AKM23 are temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 according to the order of creation. For example, the first created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB11, the next created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB12, and the subsequently created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB13. stored as

If there is backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1, the memory write processing unit 41AKM10 reads and acquires it. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this execution example, corresponding to multiplicity "3", the same backup data is distributed and stored redundantly in the three backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. For example, the backup data read from the buffer area 41AKB11 of the backup data buffer 41AKB1 is stored in the backup storage area 41AKA11 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA21 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA31 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. is stored by copying and writing to . At the start of writing the backup data to the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3, the writing flag 41AKF1 is set to ON state. At the end of writing the backup data, the write-in-progress flag 41AKF1 is cleared and turned off. When the writing flag 41AKF1 is off, the memory write processing unit 41AKM10 is permitted to write new backup data, and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1. On the other hand, when the write flag 41AKF1 is ON, the writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 is not read.

For example, when the backup data read from the buffer area 41AKB11 of the backup data buffer 41AKB1 is written to the log area and the write flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB12 can be read. The backup data read and acquired at this time is copied and written in the backup storage area 41AKA12 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area AKA22 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA32 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. remembered. When writing to the log area is thus completed and the write flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB13 can be read. In this case, the read and acquired backup data is copied and written in the backup storage area 41AKA13 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA23 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA33 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. is stored in

The backup storage unit 41AKA1 is provided as one continuous storage area by assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13, for example. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 is provided as one continuous storage area by assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23, for example. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 is provided as one continuous storage area by assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33, for example. When the write-in-progress flag 41AKF1 is ON, writing of new backup data is prohibited. As a result, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to the plurality of electronic components, if the write process of the backup data corresponding to one of the conditions is being executed, , the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition is not executed.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are met, if the backup data write process corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is being executed, the write flag 41AKF1 must be on. , the backup data write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is not executed. Alternatively, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are met, if the backup data write processing corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is being executed, the write flag 41AKF1 is turned on. In response to this, the write processing of the backup data corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is not executed. Which write process should be executed first may be determined according to the order of creation of the backup data. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and the effect control error determination 41AKC3 are met, and when the conditions for the effect control error determination 41AKC3 and the CPU internal error 41AKC1 are met, the writing process is similarly executed. You can control it. In this way, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are met, there is a limit that backup data write processing corresponding to one condition is not executed while backup data write processing corresponding to one condition is being executed. As a limit is set. As long as the backup data write process corresponding to one condition is not being executed, it is sufficient that the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition can be executed.

In addition, the order of creation when creating backup data may be determined according to the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 120 . For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are met, the CPU exception event processing has a higher priority than the VDP error interrupt processing. The creation of backup data by 41AKM21 may be executed prior to the creation of backup data by the event information creation processing unit 41AKM22. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and the effect control error determination 41AKC3 are met, the priority of the VDP error interrupt process is higher than the priority of the timer interrupt process for effect control, so the generated event information is created. The creation of backup data by the processing unit 41AKM22 may be executed prior to the creation of the backup data by the event information creation processing unit 41AKM23.

The condition for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 can be established according to the internal state of the control device, such as an exception event of the CPU 131 . The condition for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 can be established according to the internal state of the processor, such as the VDP 140 error interrupt request. The occurrence condition of the effect control error determination 41AKC3 can be established according to the processing result by the CPU 131, such as the determination when an error occurs in the effect control backup process. Therefore, when the CPU internal error 41AKC1 or the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 generation condition is satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the case where the effect control error determination 41AKC3 generation condition is satisfied. become.

For example, if the condition for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is satisfied multiple times, the backup data is created in the order in which the conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order in which the backup data was created. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are met multiple times, backup data is created in the order in which the conditions are met, and write processing can be executed in the order in which the backup data are created. When the generation condition of the effect control error determination 41AKC3 is met a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order of backup data creation. In these cases, writing is prohibited when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON, so that if the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed, the writing corresponding to the next occurrence condition is prohibited. Do not perform load processing. In this way, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components is met a plurality of times, the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, a limitation is provided as a limit that write processing corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. As long as the write process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is not being executed, the write process corresponding to the next occurrence condition may be executed.

It should be noted that, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any write process may be determined according to the order in which the occurrence conditions are satisfied. For example, if another occurrence condition is met during the execution of the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is met earlier, the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is met later may not be executed. Alternatively, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any write process may be determined according to the process priority. For example, if the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 generation conditions are satisfied at the same time, the CPU internal The write process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 may not be executed. Further, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are met, overwrite processing may be executed according to the processing priority. For example, if the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 generation conditions are satisfied at the same time, the CPU internal The write process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed as an overwrite process for overwriting the stored data by the write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2.

When a plurality of backup conditions are met as a plurality of occurrence conditions, the order of creating backup data and whether or not to execute write processing may be determined according to the contents of the data to be backed up. For example, if the backup condition for when an error occurs that the data to be backed up is effect control error data and the backup condition for when a command is received that the data to be backed up is received command data are satisfied at the same time, the backup condition for when an error occurs The write process corresponding to the command may be executed first, and the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of command reception may be executed later. Alternatively, the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when an error occurs may be executed, and the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the command is received may not be executed. In this case, since the information regarding the failure of the electronic parts including the effect device is preferentially stored, the possibility that the failure of the electronic parts can be dealt with appropriately is increased. Alternatively, the writing process corresponding to the backup conditions at the time of command reception may be executed first, and the writing process corresponding to the backup conditions at the time of error occurrence may be executed later. Alternatively, the write process corresponding to the backup conditions when the command is received may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the backup conditions when an error occurs may not be executed. In this case, since the information regarding the reception status of the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is preferentially stored, the possibility of being able to appropriately deal with the control problems related to the game is increased.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 42AK)
FIG. 18 shows an execution example of backup processing for the characteristic portion 42AK. In this case, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, so that the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13, the occurrence event information creation processing units 42AKM21 to It has the function of 42AKM23. The backup data memories 210A-210C of the backup memory board 14 are provided with backup storage units 42AKA11-42AKA13, backup storage units 42AKA21-42AKA23, and backup storage units 42AKA31-42AKA33. The backup storage unit 42AKA11 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA12 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA13 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA21 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA211 to 42AKA213 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA22 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA23 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA31 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA32 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA33 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333 as log areas.

The event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data indicating event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 42AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exception backup process in step S42 of the CPU exception event occurrence process. good. The event information creation processing unit 42AKM22 creates backup data indicating event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the error interrupt backup process in step S52 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Just do it. Occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM23 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to occurrence of error determination 42AKC3 during effect control. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process during control of the effect in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process, and data indicating the log information including the effect control error data. If it is The backup data created by the event information creation processing units 42AKM21 to 42AKM23 can be stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3 in parallel with each other.

The memory write processing unit 42AKM11 acquires backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory write processing unit 42AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory write processing unit 42AKM13 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKM23. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3.

This execution example also corresponds to the multiplicity of "3". In the three backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13, the same backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 are stored in a distributed manner while overlapping. In the three backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23, the same backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKM22 are stored in a distributed manner while overlapping. In the three backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33, the same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKA23 are stored in an overlapping and distributed manner. For example, the backup data first acquired from the event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 42AKA111 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA121 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA131 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. , is stored by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 are stored in the backup storage area 42AKA112 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA122 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA132 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing. The backup data obtained next from the event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 are the backup storage area 42AKA113 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA123 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA133 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. is stored by copying and writing to .

In the backup storage units 42AKA11-42AKA13 and the backup storage units 42AKA21-42AKA23, for example, different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas 42AKA111-42AKA113 and the backup storage areas 42AKA211-42AKA213. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA131 to 42AKA133 and the backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233, thereby providing different storage areas. In the backup storage areas 42AKA21 to 42AKA23 and the backup storage sections 42AKA31 to 42AKA33, for example, different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas 42AKA211 to 42AKA213 and the backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA231 to 42AKA233 and the backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333, thereby providing different storage areas. In the backup storage units 42AKA31-42AKA33 and the backup storage units 42AKA11-42AKA13, for example, different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas 42AKA311-42AKA313 and the backup storage areas 42AKA111-42AKA113. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA331 to 42AKA333 and the backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133, thereby providing different storage areas. Note that different storage areas may be provided by using physically different storage devices. The memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can perform write processing of backup data in parallel with each other. Accordingly, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to the plurality of electronic components, even while the backup data write process corresponding to one condition is being executed, the other event occurrence condition It is possible to execute write processing of backup data corresponding to the conditions.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are satisfied, even if the memory write processing unit 42AKM11 is executing the backup data write processing corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC1, the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 can execute backup data write processing corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 and the effect control error determination 42AKC3 are satisfied, the memory write processing is performed even when the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 is executing the backup data write processing corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. The part 42AKM13 can execute the writing process of the backup data corresponding to the effect control error determination 42AKC3. When the condition for generating the effect control error determination 42AKC3 and the CPU internal error 42AKC1 is met, the memory write process is performed even while the memory write processing unit 42AKM13 is executing the write process of the backup data corresponding to the effect control error determination 42AKC3. The unit 42AKM11 can perform write processing of backup data corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC. In this way, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are met, even if backup data write processing corresponding to one condition is being executed, backup data write processing corresponding to the other condition can be executed. I wish I could. As long as the backup data write process corresponding to one of the conditions is not being executed, the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition may of course be executed.

The conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 can be established according to the internal state of the control device, such as an exception event of the CPU 131 . The condition for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 can be established according to the internal state of the processor, such as the VDP 140 error interrupt request. The occurrence condition of the effect control error determination 42AKC3 can be established according to the processing result by the CPU 131, such as the determination when an error occurs in the effect control backup process. Therefore, when the CPU internal error 42AKC1 or VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 occurrence conditions are satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the case where the effect control error determination 42AKC3 occurrence conditions are satisfied. can be For example, when the backup data is created, the creation order is determined according to the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 120, so that the backup data write processing by the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 is also performed in the order of creation. It may be executed with priority accordingly.

FIG. 19 shows an execution example different from the case of FIG. 18 for the backup processing regarding the characteristic part 42AK. In this execution example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are met multiple times, the backup data is created in the order in which the conditions are met, and the write process can be executed in the order in which the backup data were created. . In this case, a predetermined area of external RAM 122 or internal RAM 133 is provided with a writing flag 42AKF1 and a backup data buffer 42AKB1. The backup data buffer 42AKB1 has a plurality of buffer areas including buffer areas 42AKB11 to 42AKB13. The event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data in the order in which the CPU internal errors 42AKC1 have occurred. For example, when the occurrence conditions for the CPU internal errors X1 to Xn corresponding to n times are satisfied as the CPU internal error 42AKC1 multiple times, the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 generates the backup data Y1 corresponding to the occurrence conditions for each time. ˜Yn and temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. For example, the first created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB11, the next created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB12, and the subsequently created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB13. stored as If there is backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1, the memory write processing unit 42AKM11 reads and acquires it. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13. At the start of writing backup data to the log area, the writing flag 42AKF1 is set to ON. At the end of writing the backup data, the write-in-progress flag 42AKF1 is cleared and turned off. When the writing flag 42AKF1 is off, the memory write processing unit 42AKM11 is permitted to write new backup data, and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. On the other hand, when the write flag 42AKF1 is ON, the writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1 is not read.

Even if the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are met multiple times, the backup data is created in the order in which the conditions are met, and the write process can be executed in the order in which the backup data are created. Even when the generation conditions of the effect control error determination 42AKC3 are met a plurality of times, the backup data are created in the order in which the occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order of the creation of the backup data. . In these cases, writing is prohibited when the writing flag provided corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 and the effect control error determination 42AKC3 is ON, so that the previous occurrence condition is met. If the writing process is being executed, the writing process corresponding to the next generation condition is not executed. In this way, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components is met a plurality of times, the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, there is a limit that write processing corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. As long as the write process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is not being executed, the write process corresponding to the next occurrence condition may be executed.

It should be noted that, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any write process may be determined according to the order in which the occurrence conditions are satisfied. For example, if another occurrence condition is met during the execution of the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is met earlier, the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is met later may not be executed. Alternatively, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any write process may be determined according to the process priority. For example, among the exceptional events of the CPU 131, an exceptional event with a high processing priority and an exceptional event with a low processing priority may be set in advance. When the condition for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 is satisfied multiple times at the same time, the write processing corresponding to the exception event with high processing priority is executed, and the write processing corresponding to the exception event with low processing priority is executed. It may not be executed. Further, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are met, overwrite processing may be executed according to the processing priority. For example, when the condition for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 is satisfied multiple times at the same time, the write processing corresponding to the exception event with high processing priority will replace the stored data by the write processing corresponding to the exception event with low processing priority. It may be executed as an overwriting process for overwriting.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 43AK)
FIG. 20 shows an execution example of backup processing for the characteristic portion 43AK. In this case, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, so that the functions of the memory write processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 and the event information creation process and the functions of parts 43AKM21 and 43AKM22. The backup data memories 210A to 210C of the backup memory board 14 are provided with the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 and a backup storage unit 43AKA21. The backup storage unit 43AKA11 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA111 to 43AKA113 as log areas. The backup storage unit 43AKA12 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA121 to 43AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 43AKA13 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA131 to 43AKA133 as log areas. On the other hand, the backup storage unit 43AKA21 is a 3-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA211 to 43AKA213 as log areas. The 8-bit storage area is a storage area in which storage data can be written and read in units of 8 bits. The 3-bit storage area is a storage area in which storage data can be written and read in 3-bit units.

Occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 creates backup data corresponding to a case where a backup condition of a storage area bit number of "8" and a multiplicity of "3" is satisfied. The memory write processing unit 43AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. In the three backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, which are 8-bit storage areas, the same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 are stored in an overlapping and distributed manner. For example, the backup data first acquired from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA111 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA121 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA131 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. , is stored by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 are stored in the backup storage area 43AKA112 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA122 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA132 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 are the backup storage area 43AKA113 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA123 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA133 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. is stored by copying and writing to .

Occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition of the number of storage area bits being "3" and the multiplicity being "1" is satisfied. The memory write processing unit 43AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log area of the backup storage unit 43AKA21. In the backup storage unit 43AKA21, which is a 3-bit storage area, the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored in a smaller storage area than the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. stored in the area. Specifically, corresponding to the number of bits of the storage area of "3", a 3-bit storage area is used which is storage data in units of 3 bits, which is smaller than the 8-bit unit of the 8-bit storage area. Also, when the multiplicity is "1", mirroring is not performed and single backup data is stored without distribution. For example, the backup data first obtained from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA211 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA212 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The next backup data acquired from the event information creation processing unit 22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA213 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying.

In the backup control table 120T, when the data to be backed up is system data, performance control error data, player history data, received command data, or setting value change time data, the number of storage area bits is "8". The severity is designated as "3". On the other hand, in the case of any one of power saving setting data, current time change data, power cut time data, store name setting data, effect output amount data, the number of storage area bits is "3" and the multiplicity is "1". is set to For example, when the backup condition corresponding to the system data is satisfied for the data to be backed up, the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM11. It is written and stored in the log area. On the other hand, when the backup condition corresponding to the power saving setting data is satisfied, the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored in the backup storage unit 43AKA21 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM12. It is written and stored in the log area. Thus, when writing the first information corresponding to the first occurrence condition, the same backup data is stored in a plurality of log areas in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. On the other hand, when writing the second information corresponding to the second occurrence condition, the backup data is stored in a small log area in the backup storage unit 43AKA21.

For example, the occurrence condition at the time of power saving change, in which the data to be backed up is the backup condition corresponding to the power saving setting data, is met less frequently than the occurrence condition at the time of data update, in which the data to be backed up is the backup condition corresponding to the system data. In this way, the second occurrence condition may be any condition as long as it is met less frequently than the first occurrence condition. An event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is frequently established affects the storage of log information related to other events when log information cannot be stored properly, such as when noise occurs during writing processing. likely to give An event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is met less frequently is less likely to affect storage of log information related to other events than an event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is met more frequently. Therefore, when writing log information corresponding to an occurrence condition that is frequently established, by storing the same backup data in a plurality of log areas, it is possible to prevent problems caused by abnormalities in stored data from spreading. On the other hand, when writing log information corresponding to an occurrence condition with a low frequency of occurrence, an increase in the storage data capacity can be prevented by storing backup data in a small log area.

The power-saving setting data can be set by an administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as an attendant of a game arcade, for example. Thus, the second information corresponding to the second occurrence condition may be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Data that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko game machine 1 can be set again by the administrator even if a problem occurs in the setting contents, and there is no possibility of giving disadvantage to the player of the pachinko game machine 1. low. On the other hand, for example, it is impossible or difficult to reset data corresponding to the occurrence conditions of events that occur according to the progress of a game or performance, and there is a high possibility that the player will be disadvantaged or distrusted. It shows information about Therefore, when writing log information corresponding to occurrence conditions that cannot be set by the administrator of the pachinko game machine 1, by storing the same backup data in a plurality of log areas, it is possible to accurately verify when an abnormality occurs. sexuality is enhanced. On the other hand, when writing log information corresponding to generation conditions that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the storage data capacity can be prevented from increasing by storing backup data in a small log area. The information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 is not limited to the information indicated in the power saving setting data, but also the RTC information indicated in the current time change data, the shop name information indicated in the shop name setting data, It may be information on the sound volume or the amount of light indicated by the effect output amount data, or a combination of some or all of these. In addition, when a projector is used as an effect device, information on display settings by the projector may be included in the information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . It should be noted that the information of the display setting by the projector can be set by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1, unlike the person in charge of the game hall. In this way, the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include the staff of the game hall, or may include the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include setting information related to the frequency of performance using a specific performance device, not limited to the projector.

In the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, which are 8-bit storage areas, different backup storage areas may be provided according to the types of log information indicated in the backup data. For example, the backup storage area when the data to be backed up is received command data may be provided as a storage area different from the backup storage area when the data to be backed up is effect control error data. Inside or outside the backup storage area corresponding to the effect control error data, a backup storage area corresponding to the occurrence of an exception event of the CPU 131 or an error interrupt request of the VDP 140 may be provided. In this way, when a backup storage area corresponding to the type of log information is provided in the 8-bit storage area, the memory write processing unit 43AKM11 stores the backup storage area determined according to the established backup condition. , the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 may be written and stored.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 44AK)
FIG. 21 shows a configuration example regarding the characteristic portion 44AK. In this configuration example, a first effect control board 44AK12A and a second effect control board 44AK12B are provided. 1st production control board 44AK12A and 2nd production control board 44AK12B should just have the composition and function which production control board 12 and backup memory board 14 in the above-mentioned example have. 1st control part 44AK10A, 1st backup storage part 44AK11A, and connector 44AK13A are mounted in 1st production|presentation control board 44AK12A. A second control unit 44AK10B, a second backup storage unit 44AK11B, and a connector 44AK13B are mounted on the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13A of the first effect control board 44AK12A is connected to the connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B is connected to the connector 44AK11B of the first effect control board 44AK12A. The 1st control part 44AK10A and the 2nd control part 44AK10B should just each have a part or all of the structure and the function with which microcomputer 120 for production control in the above-mentioned example is provided. For example, the 1st control part 44AK10A is provided with the structure and function regarding CPU131 of the microcomputer 120 for production control, and the 2nd control part 44AK10B is provided with the structure and function regarding VDP140 of the microcomputer 120 for production control. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may each have a part or all of the configuration and functions of the backup memory board 14 in the above embodiment. For example, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A has the configuration and functions related to the backup data memories 210A and 210B of the backup memory board 14, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B has the configuration and functions related to the backup data memories 210C and 210D of the backup memory board 14. It has functionality.

In the first effect control board 44AK12A, the first control unit 44AK10A, when having the configuration and functions related to the CPU 131 in the above embodiment, for example, the serial communication circuit 137 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the effect of the effect data memory board 16 A process for controlling the first electronic component, such as a data memory, is executed. In this case, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A stores backup data indicating log information regarding the first control unit 44AK10A. In the second production control board 44AK12B, the second control unit 44AK10B, in the case of having the configuration and functions related to the VDP 140 in the above embodiment, for example, the sound processing circuit 141 of the production control microcomputer 120, the lamp control circuit 142, the motor control circuit 143, the image display device 5, and the like to control the second electronic components. In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B stores backup data indicating log information regarding the second control unit 44AK10B. Thus, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can store information about the first control unit 44AK10A, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can store information about the second control unit 44AK10B.

When the first control unit 44AK10A has the configuration and functions related to the CPU 131, the log information including the exception event information of the CPU 131 is stored by executing the exception backup process in step S42 in the CPU exception event occurrence process. It is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When the second control unit 44AK10B has the configuration and functions related to the VDP 140, the log information including the VDP error information of the VDP 140 is executed by executing the error interrupt backup process of step S52 in the VDP error interrupt process. is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. In this way, when the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, the exception backup process in the CPU exception event occurrence process is executed. On the other hand, when the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, VDP error allocation is performed as a different process from the case where the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. A backup process may be executed when an error interrupt occurs in the load process. In addition, when log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and when log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, arbitrary storage processing different from each other is performed. may

Log information including exceptional event information of the CPU 131 is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. On the other hand, in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information including VDP error information of the VDP 140 is stored as information different from the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. Alternatively, the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A stores log information related to errors occurring in the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, for example. On the other hand, in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, for example, log information regarding errors that have occurred in the image display device 5 is stored. In addition, the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may store different log information related to arbitrary electronic components.

Note that the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A may store log information corresponding to the event occurrence conditions related to the first control unit 44AK10A. Log information corresponding to an event occurrence condition related to the second control unit 44AK10B may be stored. The log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may store log information corresponding to the event occurrence conditions related to the second control unit 44AK10B. Log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event related to the part 44AK10A may be stored. If log information from both log areas is stored in both log areas, even if a storage error occurs in one log area, inspection such as analysis can be performed using the log information stored in the other log area. It becomes possible, and the reliability of the stored data is improved. The configuration and functions related to the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 and the configuration and functions related to the VDP 140 of the production control microcomputer 120 are not limited to dividing into the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B, For example, the configuration and functions related to the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 may be divided into the first control section 44AK10A and the second control section 44AK10B. Alternatively, the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B may be provided corresponding to a plurality of CPUs. The first control unit 44AK10A may have a configuration and functions related to a CPU, and the second control unit 44AK10B may have a configuration and functions related to light emission control.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B are substrates different from the first production control board 44AK12A on which the first control unit 44AK10A is mounted and the second production control board 44AK12B on which the second control unit 44AK10B is mounted. , may be mounted on the backup memory board 14, for example. In this case, the log information on the electronic component called the first control unit 44AK10A mounted on the first effect control board 44AK12A, and the log information on the electronic component called the second control unit 44AK10B mounted on the second effect control board 44AK12B can be stored in the log areas of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B mounted on the common backup memory board 14. FIG. In this way, backup data indicating log information about a plurality of electronic components provided on a plurality of control boards may be stored in a log area of a storage device provided on a common backup memory board. Alternatively, the first backup memory board on which the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is mounted and the second backup memory board on which the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is mounted are combined into the first performance control board 44AK12A and the second performance control board 44AK12B. may be provided as a different substrate.

For example, the storage data capacity of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is 1 MB (megabyte). On the other hand, the storage data capacity of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is 512 KB (kilobytes). In this way, the first backup storage section 44AK11A and the second backup storage section 44AK11B may be configured as different storage devices in that the storage data capacity is different. Alternatively, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is configured using a nonvolatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark), for example. On the other hand, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is configured using, for example, an SRAM with a battery. When a nonvolatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) is used, stored data can be erased by inputting a specific signal such as a clear signal. When a battery-equipped SRAM is used, stored data can be erased by, for example, removing the battery in addition to inputting a specific signal. Alternatively, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may use different transmission methods for stored data. For example, data stored in the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is transmitted by serial communication, and data stored in the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is transmitted by parallel communication. Combinations of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, and the serial communication method and the parallel communication method can be arbitrarily changed. In this case, as the serial communication method, it is possible to send and receive communication data corresponding to a serial communication standard with a faster communication speed than the parallel communication method, or a serial communication standard with a slower communication speed than the parallel communication method may be used. Corresponding communication data may be transmitted and received. Regardless of the serial communication standard, the transmission speed of stored data may vary depending on the configuration of the data line (whether shared or not), the hardware configuration of the communication circuit, or a combination thereof. As described above, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B differ in the method of realizing the backup function, the difference in the materials used to form the memory cells, the method of erasing the stored data, and the erasure of the stored data. Both storage units may be configured as storage devices that are different from each other in that the transmission method or the transmission speed of stored data is different. In addition, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured as different storage devices due to arbitrary differences. Note that the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured to store data capacity, backup function implementation method, memory cell formation material, storage data erasing method, and other arbitrary device configurations and storage functions. A part or all of them may be configured as a common storage device. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can be arbitrarily combined with respect to their configurations and functions.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A can hold stored contents without using a backup power source, such as when configured using FRAM (registered trademark). In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can hold the stored content using a backup power source, such as when configured using an SRAM with a battery. In such a configuration, part or all of the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may also be stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When part of the log information is stored, the target log information is based on the update frequency, update data volume, data importance, target parts, target control, combination of some or all of these, etc. , should be determined in advance. In a storage device capable of retaining stored content using a backup power supply, stored data is erased when the backup power supply is lost. Therefore, by storing data stored in a storage device capable of retaining memory contents using a backup power supply in a storage device capable of retaining memory contents without using a backup power supply, loss of memory data can be reliably prevented. can be prevented.

Whether or not to display on the maintenance history screen depends on whether the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. setting may be different. For example, log information stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can be displayed on the maintenance history screen, while log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. may be set not to be displayed. Even in this case, if the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is also stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, substantially all log information can be stored. It can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is not read when the maintenance history screen is displayed. are handled differently. When any output is performed, not limited to the display of the maintenance history screen, the setting of whether or not log information is to be read is different between the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. good too. As described above, the log information stored in the log area of either the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is limited to not being read out when outputting. may be restricted. On the other hand, the range of log information stored in the other log area may be read when outputting.

The configuration and functions provided by the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 in the above embodiment are the first effect control board 44AK12A provided with the first control unit 44AK10A and the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, the second control unit 44AK10B and the It is realized by a configuration divided into a second effect control board 44AK12B provided with a second backup storage section 44AK11B. In this case, the development of the configuration and functions provided by the first effect control board 44AK12A and the development of the configuration and functions provided by the second effect control board 44AK12B are, for example, shared by separate developers and advanced in parallel. be able to. As a result, the burden of development work can be reduced, and an increase in manufacturing costs can be prevented.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 45AK)
FIG. 22 shows a setting example of an inspection designation command relating to the characteristic portion 45AK. The inspection designation command is included in a plurality of test commands received, for example, when executing backup inspection processing. FIG. 22A shows a setting example 45AK01 of an inspection designation command capable of designating an inspection output unit and a communication method. The output unit for inspection should be able to select and designate a connector to be used as the signal output unit for inspection from among the connectors 152 to 156, for example. The output unit for inspection should be capable of inputting/outputting an inspection signal and outputting a read signal corresponding to backup data. The communication method may be parallel or serial, and in the case of serial, serial communication standards such as UART, SPI, and I2C can be selected and specified. A plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 are prepared in advance as inspection designation commands in the setting example 45AK01. A plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 may be different in inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 and communication method designation contents.

The connector 152 is wire-connected to the effect control relay board 17, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as the driver circuit mounted on the driver board 19, the effect motor 60, and the effect LED 61, for example. The connector 153 is wire-connected to the lamp output board 13 and is capable of outputting a control signal to an electronic component such as a driver circuit mounted on the lamp output board 13 . The connector 154 is wire-connected to the backup memory board 14, and can output control signals to a plurality of electronic components such as the RTC 201, the serial communication circuit 202, and the backup data memories 210A to 210D mounted on the backup memory board 14, for example. The connector 155 is wire-connected to the effect data memory board 16, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as a plurality of effect data memories mounted on the effect data memory board 16, for example. In this way, connectors 152-155 can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components. On the other hand, the connectors 152 to 155 are designated as any one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, so that the backup data read signal indicating the log information read from the log area is output. It is possible to output a read signal corresponding to the stored information. Since the connector 156 is wire-connected to the inspection device of the pachinko game machine 1, no control signal for electronic components is output. On the other hand, the connector 156 can output a read signal corresponding to stored information, such as a backup data read signal indicating log information read from the log area. For example, the connector 156 is designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, and becomes an output terminal for a read signal corresponding to the log information.

The inspection output units 45AKC1-45AKC4 that can be designated by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1-45AKA4 may include some of the connectors 152-156 or all of the connectors 152-156. Further, the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 may include a connector common to each other, or may include a connector different from that of the other inspection output units. For example, the effect relay wiring connector 152 can input and output multiple types of control signals and detection signals according to the specifications of various circuits mounted on the effect control relay board 17, the audio output board 18, and the driver board 19. configured and included in the inspection output sections 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4. On the other hand, for example, the frame lamp wiring connector 153 is configured to be capable of inputting and outputting parallel signals, and is included in the inspection output section 45AKC1 of the inspection designation command 45AKA1 that designates parallel as the communication method. On the other hand, the connector 153 is not included in the inspection output sections 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA2 to 45AKA4 specifying any of the serial communication standards as the communication method. Further, for example, the connector 154 for backup wiring is configured to be capable of inputting/outputting a signal conforming to the SPI serial communication standard, and the inspection output section 45AKC3 of the inspection designation command 45AKA3 that designates the SPI serial communication standard as the communication method. include. On the other hand, the connector 154 is not included in the inspection output units 45AKC1, 45AKC2, and 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1, 45AKA2, and 45AKA4 for which parallel, UART, and I2C serial signal standards are designated as the communication method. As described above, the connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components are composed of the connector 152 capable of outputting signals according to a plurality of signaling methods and the connectors 153 and 154 capable of outputting signals according to a specific signaling method. may contain Connectors 152 to 156 that can be designated as inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 include connectors 152 to 155 that can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and connectors 152 to 155 that can output control signals for electronic components. and connectors 156 that are not connected. By designating the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 with the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, the signal output units corresponding to the multiple types of received information are selected from a plurality of different signal output units such as the connectors 152 to 156. Then, inspection information corresponding to the inspection signal, such as a backup data readout signal, can be output.

The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 can execute various lottery processes related to the presence or absence of effect and the mode of effect, such as lottery process for advance notice effect. Based on the lottery result of such lottery processing, control signals corresponding to various control information are output. For example, when it is decided to execute a specific advance notice effect as a lottery result of the notice effect, a control signal for reading the pattern data of the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the notice effect is sent to the effect data wiring connector. 155 and transmitted to the performance data memory board 16 via the performance data wiring. In this case, in accordance with the read pattern data of the notice effect control pattern, a control signal (audio signal) for controlling the sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R and a control signal for controlling the drive state of the effect motor 60 (Drive control signal) and the like are output from the connector 152 for effect relay wiring, and are transmitted to the effect control relay board 17 via the effect relay wire. A control signal (electrical signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is output from the frame lamp wiring connector 153 and transmitted to the lamp output board via the frame lamp wiring. On the other hand, the backup wiring connector 154 can output a control signal for electronic components such as the backup data memories 210A to 210D provided on the backup memory board 14. This control signal is the lottery result of the lottery process. It is not output based on Thus, the connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components include connectors 152, 153, 155 capable of outputting control signals based on the lottery results, and a connector 154 different from these. there is

The connectors 152, 153, and 155 need only be capable of outputting control signals based on the lottery results and outputting control signals independent of the lottery results. As an example, when a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, a control signal for controlling the demonstration effect without executing the lottery process is output from the connectors 152, 153, 155 and the like. be. Of these, the connector 152 for effect relay wiring is provided with a control signal (audio signal) for controlling the sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R and a control signal (drive control signal) for controlling the driving state of the effect motor 60. It is possible to output a control signal according to the control information of the speakers 8L and 8R as a performance device, the performance motor 60 and the performance LED 61. The frame lamp wiring connector 153 can output a control signal corresponding to the control information of the game effect lamp 9 as a production device, such as a control signal (electrical decoration signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. be. On the other hand, the effect data wiring connector 155 can output a control signal corresponding to control information of an electronic component different from the effect device, such as a control signal for controlling the reading process of the effect data memory. In addition, the backup wiring connector 154 can output control signals corresponding to control information of electronic components different from the production device, such as control signals for controlling read processing and write processing of the backup data memories 210A to 210D. is. In this way, the connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components are the connectors 152 and 153 capable of outputting control signals corresponding to the control information of the production device, and the control signals for electronic components other than the production device. and connectors 154 and 155 capable of outputting .

FIG. 22B shows a setting example 45AK02 of an inspection designation command that can designate inspection output data. Some or all of the data stored in the log areas of the backup data memories 210A to 210D provided on the backup memory board 14 can be selected and designated as the inspection output data as backup data indicating log information. If it is The output data for inspection is outputted from the connectors 152 to 156 designated as any one of the output units for inspection 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4. A plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 are prepared in advance as inspection designation commands in the setting example 45AK02. The plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 differ in inspection output data.

The inspection designation command 45AKB1 designates system data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB2 designates the performance control error data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation 45 command AKB3 designates player history data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB4 designates received command data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB5 designates setting change time data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB6 designates power saving setting data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB7 designates the current time setting data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB8 designates power-off time data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB9 designates store name setting data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB10 designates effect output amount data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB11 designates performance history data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB12 designates all stored data as inspection output data.

Backup data that can be output by specifying it as inspection output data may indicate information about a plurality of electronic components or may indicate game-related information about a game. For example, when the production control error data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB2, it becomes possible to output the backup data including the production control error data, and it is possible to specify the error that occurred regarding the electronic parts including the production device. backup data is output.

On the other hand, if the player history data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB3, it becomes possible to output the backup data including the player history data, and whether an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic parts has occurred. Regardless of whether or not the data regarding the player has been updated, the backup data at the time of data update is output. When the received command data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB4, the backup data including the received command data can be output, regardless of whether or not events corresponding to a plurality of electronic components have occurred. Backup data at the time of reception of the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is output. When the store name setting data is designated as inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB9, backup data including the store name setting data can be output, regardless of whether or not events corresponding to a plurality of electronic components have occurred. First, the backup data at the time of setting the name of the store corresponding to the game arcade is output. When the system data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB1, the backup data including the system data can be output. Backup data including system data is stored regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred, and backup data when updating data due to the occurrence of an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. backup data at the time of data update. By outputting backup data at the time of data update for system data, backup data in the event that an event occurs for multiple electronic components, regardless of whether an event occurs for multiple electronic components Backup data at the time of data update is output. In this way, information about electronic parts, game-related information about games, or general information unrelated to electronic parts or games can be output according to the contents of the inspection output data specified by the inspection specification command. . In addition, it is not limited to the specified contents of the inspection output data by the inspection specifying command, and information about the electronic parts and the , game-related information about a game, or general information unrelated to electronic components or games, may be switchable. It is not limited to the detection result, and can switch output information such as information on electronic parts, game-related information on games, or general information unrelated to electronic parts or games according to arbitrary control and processing. I wish I had.

(Regarding deformation and application, etc.)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, some of the features explained in the above embodiment It may be provided with the configuration of.

The pachinko game machine 1 may not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the start winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is changed from the closed state (second state) to the open state ( 1 state), and when the game ball that has entered the inside of the variable winning device enters a specific area (V winning opening) out of a plurality of areas, it is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured as follows.

In the above embodiments, the "ratio" and "probability" of various decisions are 0% (no decision is made) or 100% (always possible), such as 70:30. It may be set so that it will never be decided), or at least the probability of any decision outcome is 0% (never decided) or 100% (always decided). may be set. For example, when making various decisions, if the ratio of any one decision result among multiple decision results is higher than the ratio of other decision results, the ratio of 1 decision result is It may include being 100%, or it may include being 0% as a percentage of other determination results. When the ratio of one decision result is 100%, the ratio of other decision results is 0%. Also, when the ratio of other decision results is 0%, if the ratio of 1 decision result is a predetermined ratio other than 100% but not 0%, the ratio of 1 decision result is the other decision result. higher than the ratio of

In addition, various effects including the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation on the image display device, the sound output operation on the speaker, and the lighting operation on the game effect lamp and the performance LED Operations and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the scope of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of winning, but is a gaming machine that encloses game media and pays points based on the occurrence of winning. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that provides

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols that serve as identification information of a plurality of types, and giving a predetermined game value based on the game result. More specifically, By setting a predetermined number of bets (number of medals or number of credits) for one game, the game can be started, and a variable display device ( One game is completed by deriving and displaying the display results of, for example, a plurality of reels, etc.), and prizes are awarded according to the display results (for example, cherry prizes, watermelon prizes, bell prizes, replay prizes, BB prizes, RB prizes, etc.). is a gaming machine that can occur. In such a slot machine, the hardware resources including the effect movable mechanism provided on the front side of the slot machine cooperate with the software that performs the predetermined processing, thereby realizing the pachinko machine shown in the above embodiment. All or part of the features of the gaming machine 1 may be provided.

Slot machines are not limited to those in which the bet amount is set using medals and credits as game value, and slot machines in which the bet amount is set using game balls as game value and credits only as game value. It may also be a full credit slot machine where the bet is set using . When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. Equivalent to setting The pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of multiple types of game values such as medals and game balls. A game value may be used together. For example, in a slot machine, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. Any of the types of gaming values may be paid out.

Programs and data for realizing the present invention are limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a game machine, such as a pachinko game machine 1 or a slot machine. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of a computer device or the like instead of being distributed. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 41AK)
A gaming machine capable of playing a game, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components, for example, control means such as a production control microcomputer 120, and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. and storage means such as backup data memories 210A to 210D capable of storing information on a plurality of electronic components, and the control means controls events corresponding to the plurality of electronic components. When the occurrence condition is satisfied, as the write processing for writing information to the storage means, for example, the write processing by the memory write processing unit 41AKM10 can be executed, and the storage means includes, for example, backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13. A storage area in which first information corresponding to a first occurrence condition is written, such as a backup storage unit 41AKA1, and a storage area in which second information corresponding to a second occurrence condition is written are provided as one continuous area, For example, when a first occurrence condition and a second occurrence condition are met, such as write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON, during the execution of the process of writing information corresponding to one of the conditions, the other Do not execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the condition. In this manner, while the process of writing information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition is being executed, the process of writing information corresponding to the other condition is not executed, thereby avoiding conflict between the processes of writing information. be. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The occurrence condition may be established according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the control means is established, the writing process is executed to write the information on the electronic parts into the storage means, and the information on the electronic parts including the control means is stored. be able to. This enables appropriate management of information.

The first occurrence condition, for example, CPU internal error 41AKC1, VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, etc., can be established according to the internal state of the control means, the second occurrence condition, for example, such as production control error determination 41AKC3, by the control means It can be established depending on the processing result, and for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. In this way, when the first occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the control means is established, writing is given priority over the case where the second occurrence condition that can be established according to the processing result of the control means is established. If the write process is executed, the priority of the write process is set while avoiding the competition of the write processes of the information on the electronic components. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the next condition is set according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition, such as the writing flag 41AKF1, is being executed. The process of writing the corresponding information may be restricted. If the information writing process is restricted according to such execution information, the process conflict can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The write process may store the same information in a plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. By storing the same information in a plurality of storage areas in this manner, the reliability of the information is enhanced. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

When a write condition different from the generation condition is established, the control means writes game-related information different from the information on the plurality of electronic components into the storage means, for example, backup processing according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. etc. may be executable. In this way, if it becomes possible to execute the process of writing game-related information in response to a write condition different from the generation condition, various information can be stored and managed. This enables appropriate management of information.

For example, output means, such as connectors 152 to 155, capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components and capable of outputting read signals corresponding to information stored in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the readout signal, complication of the device configuration and increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

First output means such as connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and connector 156 capable of outputting a read signal corresponding to information stored in the storage means unlike the first output means. and a second output means such as. In this manner, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 42AK)
A gaming machine capable of playing a game, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components, for example, control means such as a production control microcomputer 120, and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. and storage means such as backup data memories 210A to 210D capable of storing information on a plurality of electronic components, and the control means controls events corresponding to the plurality of electronic components. As write processing for writing information to the storage means when the generation condition is established, for example, write processing by the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can be executed. a backup storage unit 42AKA11 including backup storage areas 42AKA211 to 42AKA213; a backup storage unit 42AKA31 including backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313; , and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second occurrence condition is written is provided as a different area. is established, it is possible to execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition even while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed. In this way, even during the execution of the process of writing information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition, the process of writing information corresponding to the other can be executed, so the efficiency of the information writing process can be improved. . This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The occurrence condition may be established according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the control means is established, the writing process is executed to write the information on the electronic parts into the storage means, and the information on the electronic parts including the control means is stored. be able to. This enables appropriate management of information.

The first occurrence condition, for example, CPU internal error 41AKC1, VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, etc., can be established according to the internal state of the control means, the second occurrence condition, for example, such as effect control error determination 41AKC3, depending on the control means It can be established depending on the processing result, and for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. In this way, when the first occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the control means is established, writing is given priority over the case where the second occurrence condition that can be established according to the processing result of the control means is established. If the write process is executed, the priority of the write process is set while avoiding conflict between the write processes of the information on the electronic components. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the next condition is set according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition, such as the writing flag 41AKF1, is being executed. You may restrict|limit the process which writes corresponding information. If the information writing process is restricted according to such execution information, the process conflict can be easily avoided. This enables appropriate management of information.

The write process may store the same information in a plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. By storing the same information in a plurality of storage areas in this manner, the reliability of the information is enhanced. This enables appropriate management of information.

When a write condition different from the generation condition is established, the control means writes game-related information different from the information on the plurality of electronic components into the storage means, for example, backup processing according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. etc. may be executable. In this way, if it becomes possible to execute the process of writing game-related information in response to a write condition different from the generation condition, various information can be stored and managed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

For example, output means, such as connectors 152 to 155, capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components and capable of outputting read signals corresponding to information stored in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the readout signal, complication of the device configuration and increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

First output means such as connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and connector 156 capable of outputting a read signal corresponding to information stored in the storage means unlike the first output means. and a second output means such as. In this manner, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 43AK)
A gaming machine capable of playing a game, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components, for example, control means such as a production control microcomputer 120, and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. storage means, such as backup data memories 210A to 210D, which can hold the stored contents even if the write condition is satisfied, and can store information about a plurality of electronic components. As write processing for writing information to the storage means, for example, write processing by the memory write processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 can be executed. When the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas such as 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, and the second information corresponding to the second occurrence condition is written, the information is stored in a storage area smaller than the plurality of storage areas, such as the backup storage unit 43AKA21. memorize. In this way, by providing a case where the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas and a case where information is stored in a smaller number of storage areas than the plurality of storage areas, a variety of electronic components can be obtained according to the information on the plurality of electronic components. memory is made. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

When the stored information is determined to be normal in a predetermined number of storage areas among a plurality of storage areas that store the same information as the first information, restoration is performed based on the stored information, such as restoration by power-on information processing. It may be able to perform processing. In this way, since the restoration process is executed when the stored information is determined to be normal in a predetermined number of storage areas, the reliability of the restoration based on the stored information is enhanced. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

When it is determined that the stored information corresponding to the second information is abnormal, it may be possible to execute initial processing for setting initial information, such as initial value setting by power-on information processing. Since the initial processing for setting the initial information is executed in this way, problems caused when it is determined to be abnormal can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

The second occurrence condition may be met less frequently than the first occurrence condition, such as a backup condition when power saving is set, for example. In this way, various types of storage are performed by providing the second generation condition that is less frequently satisfied. This enables appropriate management of information.

The second information may be setting information that can be set by the administrator of the gaming machine, such as power saving setting data. By storing the setting information that can be set by the administrator of the gaming machine in this manner, various types of storage are performed. This enables appropriate management of information.

Connection wires connecting the control means and the storage means, such as wires connected to terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 154 and terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 220, and terminals TM01 and TM02 of the connector 154 and a terminal TM11 of the connector 220, for example. , TM 12, or the like, for confirming the connection state between the control means and the storage means. By providing the connection confirmation wiring for confirming the connection state in this way, the certainty of memory is enhanced. This enables appropriate management of information.

For example, output means, such as connectors 152 to 155, capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components and capable of outputting read signals corresponding to information stored in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the readout signal, complication of the device configuration and increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

First output means, such as connectors 152 to 155, capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components; and a second output means. In this manner, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 44AK)
A game machine, such as a pachinko game machine 1, capable of playing a game, comprising first control means such as a first control unit 44AK10A capable of controlling first electronic components, and second control unit 44AK10B, etc. , a second control means capable of controlling the second electronic component, and a memory content that can be retained even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and that can store information about the first control means and the second control means, for example Storage means such as backup data memories 210A to 210D are provided, and when a write condition is satisfied, a write process of writing information to the storage means can be executed, and the storage means stores information related to the first control means. a first storage means such as a first backup storage section 44AK11A, and a second storage means such as a second backup storage section 44AK11B that, unlike the first storage means, can store information about the second control means. including. In this way, unlike the first storage means that can store information about the first control means, the provision of the second storage means that can store information about the second control means makes it possible to store various types of storage according to the control means. is done. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

When writing information about the first control means, processing different from writing information about the second control means may be, for example, CPU exception event occurrence processing or VDP error interrupt processing. By executing different processes in this manner, various types of storage are performed in accordance with the control means. This enables appropriate management of information.

The first storage means can store, for example, log information including exception event information of the CPU 131, and information related to the occurrence event corresponding to the first electronic component. It may also be possible to store information relating to events that occur in response to the second electronic component, such as log information including. In this way, by storing the information about the occurrence event corresponding to different electronic components, various types of storage corresponding to the electronic components are performed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The first control means can be installed on, for example, the first effect control board 12A as a board different from the first storage means, and the second control means can be installed on a board different from the second storage means, for example, the second effect It may be installed on the control board 12B or the like. By installing the control means and the storage means on different substrates in this way, the maintenance work becomes easier, and a flexible device configuration becomes possible. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The first storage means can retain stored contents using a backup power supply, for example, when using an SRAM with a battery. It may be possible to retain the memory contents without using them, and the second memory means may be capable of storing a part of the memory contents in the first memory means. In this way, a part of the contents stored in the first storage means is also stored in the second storage means, so that the certainty of storage is enhanced. This enables appropriate management of information.

For example, connection wires connecting the first and second control means and the memory means, such as wires connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 154 and the terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 220, and terminals TM01 and TM01 of the connector 154, for example. A connection confirmation wiring, such as a wiring connected to the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the TM02 and the connector 220, for confirming the connection state between the first control means and the second control means and the storage means may be provided. By providing the connection confirmation wiring for confirming the connection state in this way, the certainty of memory is enhanced. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

For example, display means such as the image display device 5 may be provided so that the information stored in the second storage means can be output by displaying the display means, for example, when displaying a maintenance history screen. In this way, by outputting the stored information as a display, it becomes easy to confirm the stored contents. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

First output means, such as connectors 152 to 155, capable of outputting control signals for the first electronic component and the second electronic component; and second output means capable of outputting a signal. In this manner, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 45AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, such as a pachinko game machine 1, which is capable of controlling electronic components, for example, a control means such as a production control microcomputer 120, and a connector capable of outputting a control signal, for example. Output means such as 152 to 155 are provided, and the output means is capable of outputting a control signal corresponding to at least part of the control information based on the lottery result by the control means. For example, a connector 154 or the like is included as output means and second output means different from the first output means. Thus, various signals are output by providing the second output means different from the first output means capable of outputting the control signal based on the lottery result. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The second output means outputs a control signal via a path different from that of the first output means within the same board as the first output means, for example, when the connector 154 different from the connectors 152, 153, and 155 is installed. It may be possible. In this way, the control signals are output through different paths, so the reliability of various signal outputs is enhanced. This enables appropriate management of information.

The second output means may be capable of outputting a control signal according to the control information of the rendering device, such as when the connector 152 is designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4. In this way, various signals are output by outputting the control signal according to the control information of the effect device. This enables appropriate management of information.

The second output means may be capable of outputting a control signal of a signaling method different from that of the first output means, such as a communication method according to the output unit setting example 45AK01. In this way, various signals are output by outputting control signals of different signaling systems. This enables appropriate management of information.

A mounting member such as a connector 156, for example, capable of mounting connection means to which the inspection device of the gaming machine is connected, may be provided, and the mounting member may be soldered when the connection means is not mounted. Such soldering prevents disconnection due to oxidation or corrosion when not mounted. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The control means can execute, for example, a backup inspection process as an inspection process for outputting inspection information related to electronic components based on the received information. Different output means may be capable of outputting examination information. In this way, the test information is output by the output means according to the received information, thereby enhancing the flexibility of information output. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The output means may be capable of outputting information relating to electronic components such as performance control error data, and game-related information relating to games such as system data and received command data. By outputting the information about the electronic parts and the game-related information about the game in this way, a variety of information is output. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 95AK)
The content of any one of the above embodiments and the characteristic portions 41AK to 45AK may be changed to the characteristic portion 95AK. The characteristic portion 95AK will be described below.

(Backup memory, backup data, etc.)
In the characteristic portion 95AK, as shown in FIG. 23-1, a 1-1 backup storage portion 95AK001 to a 1-3 backup storage portion 95AK003 and a second backup storage portion 95AK004 are prepared.

The 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 is provided in the backup data memory 210A and has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK001A, 95AK001B, 95AK001C, . . . as log areas.

The first-second backup storage unit 95AK002 is provided in the backup data memory 210B and has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK002A, 95AK002B, 95AK002C . . . as log areas.

The first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 is provided in the backup data memory 210C and has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK003A, 95AK003B, 95AK003C . . . as log areas.

The second backup storage unit 95AK004 is provided in the backup data memory 210D and has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK004A, 95AK004B, 95AK004C .

In the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 and the 2nd backup storage unit 95AK004, among the plurality of backup data backed up in the above embodiment and the characteristic units 41AK to 45AK At least part of it is stored (backed up) as either manufacturer verification data or store verification data. Note that it is arbitrary to assign the plurality of backup data to either the manufacturer confirmation data or the store confirmation data, and the following is an example.

The manufacturer confirmation data is data confirmed by the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and includes, for example, defect identification data. The failure identification data is data for identifying the failure causing the failure by confirming the behavior of the failed pachinko game machine 1 when the failure occurs. backup data with the CPU exception event occurrence as a backup condition (backup data created and backed up by the CPU exception event occurrence processing; also referred to as CPU exception event occurrence data); and (2) VDP error interrupt request occurrence. There is backup data (backup data created and backed up by the VDP error interrupt process; also called VDP error data) as a backup condition. Furthermore, as data for identifying trouble, (3) system data, (4) received command data, (5) effect output amount data, and (6) effect history, which are created and backed up by the backup process during effect control. data, etc. The manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers the malfunctioning pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5) and analyzes the log information indicated by the data. , the behavior of the pachinko game machine 1 before failure can be identified, and the identified behavior can be used to search for a defect that causes the failure of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The manufacturer identification data may include other data. For example, the manufacturer confirmation data may include player history data, shop name setting data, and the like. From these data, it is possible to grasp the tendency of the players who have played the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the tendency of the players in each area, and the like.

The data for manufacturer confirmation is created by the first occurrence event information creation processing unit (not shown) in the same way as the characteristic unit 41AK, etc., and is backed up by the first memory writing processing unit (not shown). It is written in the storage section 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage section 95AK003. The first event information creation processing unit and the first memory writing processing unit, similar to the event information creation processing unit and memory writing processing unit such as the characteristic unit 41AK, write data from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132. It is constituted by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 that executes the read program.

When a backup condition for any of the data in the manufacturer confirmation data is established, the first event information creation processing unit creates backup data indicating log information corresponding to the establishment of the backup condition as the manufacturer confirmation data. , and stored in a first backup data buffer provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 122 or internal RAM 133 (for example, each process in FIGS. 8A and 8B, step S79, etc.). The second memory write processing unit reads the backup data (manufacturer confirmation data) stored in the first backup data buffer one by one, and transfers them to the backup memory board 14 (like the characteristic portion 41AK, the write Transfer or writing of backup data may be restricted by turning on/off the middle flag 41AKF1).

The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores the transferred backup data in each of the 1-1st backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3rd backup storage unit 95AK003 (stores the same data in each storage unit). Specifically, the memory controller 200 stores (backs up) the same manufacturer confirmation data in each of the backup storage area 95AK001A, the backup storage area 95AK002A, and the backup storage area 95AK003A. , backup storage areas 95AK001C to 95AK003C, . In this way, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up with a multiplicity of 3.

The log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on the pachinko game machine 1 (image display device 5) or the like. For example, the manufacturer confirmation data is read by the manufacturer (outside the store) using a data reading device connected to the connectors 152 to 156 (such as a dedicated reading device equipped with a jig dedicated to the connectors 152 to 156). (Reading may be performed using the inspection designation command of 45AK). As a result, the data for manufacturer confirmation can be read using a connector for other purposes.

The store confirmation data is data indicating log information that can be confirmed by the staff of the store (game hall) where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed (in particular, data displayed on display means such as the image display device 5 by a predetermined operation). On the other hand, since the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data cannot be confirmed by display means or the like, it is more difficult to confirm than the log information indicated by the store confirmation data), for example, the maintenance mode history screen (Fig. 14, FIG. 15) and the setting change/confirmation history screen (FIG. 16). Here, as store confirmation data, based on (1) effect control error data ("switch error", "prize ball error", "magnet error", "unfair prize winning error", etc. described above, (2) Set value change time data (It is preferable to include the set value after change and the change start time or end time data) (“Setting change finished”, “Setting change started ”, data that forms the basis of setting change/confirmation history, etc.), (3) Setting value confirmation time data (It is preferable to include the setting value data at the time of setting value confirmation) (“Setting confirmation finished”, (4) Power saving setting data, (5) Current time change data (Based on "The time has been set", etc.) and (6) power-off time data (data on which "power-off" and the like are based). The store confirmation data includes error information data (effect control error data), data capable of specifying the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the store clerk (setting value change time data, setting value confirmation time data, etc.), should include Note that each time data may be capable of specifying the date and time (same applies below).

As backup data, (1) RAM clearing time data indicating the time of RAM clearing with RAM clearing as a backup condition (data based on "RAM clearing", etc.), (2) Power on with power on as a backup condition. power-on time data (data based on "power-on", etc.) indicating the time of , (3) restrictions on the movement of the role when the role is provided (for example, when the role is activated, Indicate the time (including date and time, the same shall apply hereinafter) and the content of the setting change, with the setting change such as prohibition of the movement of the relevant character when an object hits the surrounding equipment of the pachinko game machine 1 as a backup condition. First setting change data, (4) Second setting change data indicating the time and content of the setting change, using setting changes such as volume and execution frequency of various effects according to commands from the management computer of the store as a backup condition, (5) ) Predetermined conditions related to the game such as "probability variation not established" may be used as backup conditions, and at least one of game progress data indicating the establishment of the conditions and the time may be prepared and included in the shop confirmation data.

In the feature part 95AK, the store confirmation data does not include the CPU exception event occurrence data and the VDP error data (therefore, it is not displayed on the maintenance mode history screen or the setting change/confirmation history screen. "VDP Error", "CPU Exception Event" in FIG. 15, etc. are not displayed). This is because these data do not need to be confirmed by store employees. On the other hand, specific backup data such as power saving setting data may be included in both the manufacturer confirmation data and the store confirmation data.

The store confirmation data is created by a second occurrence event information creation processor (not shown) and written to the second backup storage unit 95AK004 by a second memory write processor (not shown). The second event information creation processing unit and the second memory writing processing unit, similar to the event information creation processing unit and memory writing processing unit such as the characteristic unit 41AK, write data from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132. It is constituted by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 that executes the read program.

The second occurrence event information creation processing unit creates, as store confirmation data, backup data indicating log information corresponding to the establishment of the backup condition when any of the backup conditions of the store confirmation data is met. , stored in a second backup data buffer provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (for example, step S79). The second memory write processing unit reads the backup data (manufacturer confirmation data) stored in the second backup data buffer one by one, and transfers them to the backup memory board 14 (like the characteristic portion 41AK, write Transfer or writing of backup data may be restricted by turning on/off the middle flag 41AKF1).

The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores the transferred backup data in the second backup storage section 95AK004. Specifically, the memory controller 200 stores (backs up) the store confirmation data in the backup storage area 95AK004A, and similarly stores the store confirmation data in the backup storage area 95AK004B, the backup storage area 95AK004C, . Stored one by one (stored sequentially from the top of the backup storage area in FIG. 23-1). In this way, the store confirmation data is backed up with a multiplicity of one.

(Backup processing)
The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 may perform backup processing shown in FIG. 23-2 at an appropriate timing. The backup process is executed for each timer interrupt. The backup process is performed, for example, during the backup process during effect control in step S79, after the process of creating backup data based on the satisfaction of the backup condition and storing the backup data in the first or second backup data buffer. It is a process to be executed (a process to be executed even when the backup condition is not satisfied), and is executed by the CPU 131 functioning as the first or second memory write processing unit.

In the backup process shown in FIG. 23-2, CPU 131 (second memory write processing unit) first determines whether or not to back up store confirmation data (step 95AKS001). This determination is made based on whether store confirmation data is stored as backup data in the second backup data buffer (if store confirmation data is stored, it is determined that the store confirmation data is backed up). It can be said that performing the backup means that a backup condition (hereinafter also referred to as a second backup condition) for backing up the store confirmation data (log information) is satisfied.

If the store confirmation data is stored in the second backup data buffer, that is, if the store confirmation data is to be backed up (step 95AKS001: Yes), the CPU 131 (second memory write processing unit) writes the store confirmation data to the second backup storage unit 95AK004 (step 95AKS002). Specifically, the CPU 131 (second memory write processing unit) transfers the shop confirmation data stored in the second backup data buffer to the backup memory board 14 together with a storage instruction to the second backup storage unit 95AK004. (The transferred store confirmation data is deleted from the second backup data buffer). The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred store confirmation data in the second backup storage unit 95AK004 in accordance with the storage instruction. As a result, the store confirmation data is backed up. In addition, when multiple store confirmation data are stored, all the store confirmation data shall be sequentially transferred in the order of the oldest stored data (the store confirmation data is originally small in data volume, so this method There is no problem if there is any), and one store confirmation data may be transferred in one backup process.

If the store confirmation data is not stored (step 95AKS001; No), or after step 95AKS002, the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) determines whether to back up the manufacturer confirmation data (step 95AKS003). This determination is made based on whether or not the data for manufacturer confirmation is stored as backup data in the first backup data buffer (if the data for manufacturer confirmation is stored, it is determined that the data for manufacturer confirmation is to be backed up). ). It can be said that performing the backup means that a backup condition (hereinafter, also referred to as a first backup condition) for backing up the manufacturer confirmation data (log information) is established.

If the manufacturer confirmation data is stored in the first backup data buffer, that is, if the manufacturer confirmation data is to be backed up (step 95AKS003: Yes), the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) Determining whether the data for manufacturer confirmation stored in the backup data buffer (if there are multiple data, the data stored most recently; the same applies to backup processing) has been written to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (step 95AKS004). This determination is made, for example, by the state of the first written flag provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (flag turned on when the manufacturer confirmation data has been transferred to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001). performed by

If it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has not been written to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 because the first written flag is off (step 95AKS004; No), the CPU 131 (first memory write process section) performs a write process for writing the manufacturer confirmation data to the 1-1 backup storage section 95AK001 (step 95AKS005). Specifically, CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) instructs the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to store the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer, and the backup memory board 14 (Note that the manufacturer confirmation data remains in the first backup data buffer even after the transfer). The transfer is basically performed once, but when the data amount of the manufacturer confirmation data is larger than a predetermined standard, or when divided backup is set for the manufacturer confirmation data, the CPU 131 (First memory write processing unit) divides the data for manufacturer confirmation and transfers part of it to the backup memory board 14 . In this case, information that can specify the transferred data is held in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133, and the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) refers to the information in step 95AKS005 that is executed again thereafter. to transfer the rest of the data. In addition, the storage instruction includes information indicating that the manufacturer confirmation data is to be divided and transferred, and the number of times of transfer. When all the manufacturer confirmation data to be written have been transferred, the first written flag is turned on. The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK003 in accordance with the storage instruction (manufacturer confirmation data is divided into multiple When it is transferred, it is divided into multiple times and stored). As a result, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up in the 1-1 backup storage section 95AK001.

When it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has been written to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (step 95AKS004; Yes), the CPU 131 (first memory write The processing unit) determines whether the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer has been written to the first-second backup storage unit 95AK002 (step 95AKS006). This determination is made, for example, by the state of the second written flag provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (flag turned on when the manufacturer confirmation data has been transferred to the first-second backup storage unit 95AK002). performed by

If it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has not been written to the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 because the second written flag is off (step 95AKS006; No), the CPU 131 (first memory write process section) performs a write process for writing the manufacturer confirmation data to the 1-2 backup storage section 95AK002 (step 95AKS007). Specifically, CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) instructs the first-second backup storage unit 95AK002 to store the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer as well as the backup memory board 14. (Note that the manufacturer confirmation data remains in the first backup data buffer even after the transfer). The transfer is basically performed once, but when divisional transfer is performed in step 95AKS005, the manufacturer confirmation data is dividedly transferred by the same processing as in step 95AKS005. After completing the transfer of the manufacturer confirmation data to be written, the second written flag is turned on. The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 in accordance with the storage instruction. As a result, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up in the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002.

If it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has been written to the first-second backup storage unit 95AK002 (step 95AKS006; Yes), the CPU 131 (first memory write The processing unit) determines whether the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer has been written to the first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 (step 95AKS008). This determination is made, for example, by the state of the third written flag provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (flag turned on when the manufacturer confirmation data has been transferred to the first-third backup storage unit 95AK003). performed by

When it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has not been written to the first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 because the third written flag is off (step 95AKS008; No), the CPU 131 (first memory write process section) performs a write process for writing the data for manufacturer confirmation to the first-third backup storage section 95AK003 (step 95AKS009). Specifically, the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) transfers the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer to the first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 together with the storage instruction to the backup memory board 14. (Note that the manufacturer confirmation data remains in the first backup data buffer even after the transfer). The transfer is basically performed once, but when divisional transfer is performed in step 95AKS005, the manufacturer confirmation data is dividedly transferred by the same processing as in step 95AKS005. After completing the transfer of the manufacturer confirmation data to be written, the third written flag is turned on. The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 in accordance with the storage instruction. As a result, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up in the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003.

When it is determined that the third written flag is on and the data for manufacturer confirmation has already been written to the first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 (step 95AKS008; Yes), the data for manufacturer confirmation is Since the backup to all of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 is completed, the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) sets the end of the backup (step 95AKS010). The end setting deletes the manufacturer confirmation data (the oldest manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer) from the first backup data buffer, and sets the first written flag to the third written flag. turn off the flag. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manufacturer confirmation data from being processed in the backup process by the next timer interrupt.

After any one of steps 95AKS005, 95AKS007, 95AKS009, and 95AKS010, or when the manufacturer confirmation data is not backed up (step 95AKS003: No), the backup process ends.

As described above, in the backup process, the store confirmation data is first backed up, and then the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up. ) is higher than the backup process (transfer or write process) of the manufacturer confirmation data. Also, the backup processing (transfer or write processing) of one store confirmation data is completed by the backup processing of one timer interrupt, but the backup processing (write processing) of one manufacturer confirmation data is completed in the first time. Since backup processing for three timer interrupts of the -1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 is required at a minimum, the processing execution time of the store confirmation data backup processing (writing processing) is It is shorter than the backup processing (writing processing) of the vendor confirmation data.

(power detection circuit 95AK010, etc.)
As shown in FIG. 23-3, a power failure detection circuit 95AK010 that supplies a power failure signal to the effect control microcomputer 120 may be provided. The power failure detection circuit 95AK010 is mounted on the effect control board 12 here, but may be mounted on a board outside the effect control board 12.

A DC voltage (driving voltage for driving the performance control microcomputer 120) is applied to the performance control board 12 from the power supply board. The DC voltage is commonly applied to the effect control microcomputer 120 and the power interruption detection circuit 95AK010. During normal operation, a voltage of 12V is applied to the effect control microcomputer 120 and the power interruption detection circuit 95AK010 as the DC voltage. The power failure detection circuit 95AK010 supplies a power failure signal to the production control microcomputer 120 to stop the operation of the production control microcomputer 120 when the applied DC voltage is 8V or less.

For example, when the power is turned on, the DC voltage from the power supply board may gradually increase and become unstable, but the effect control microcomputer 120 may operate at, for example, 3V. In such a case, when the DC voltage exceeds 3V in an unstable period in which the DC voltage is not stable after the power is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 120 starts operating at this point. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the power failure detection circuit 95AK010 continues to supply a power failure signal to the performance control microcomputer 120 until the DC voltage exceeds 8 V that will be stabilized (when it is 8 V or less). This prevents the control microcomputer 120 from starting to operate (so-called start-up for executing initialization processing and the like in step S21 of FIG. 7).

FIG. 23-4 shows the state when the pachinko game machine 1 (main board 11 and effect control board 12) having such a power interruption detection circuit 95AK010 is reset (reset with power off and on). The power failure signal is an active Low signal (a signal that becomes Low (ON) when the DC voltage is 8 V or less and becomes High (OFF) when the DC voltage exceeds 8 V). The power interruption signal may be set to active High.

When the reset is performed at the timing of (A) in FIG. 23-4, the DC voltage supplied from the power supply board to the production control board 12 (production control microcomputer 120) drops and reaches 8V (B). A power failure signal is started to be supplied from the power failure detection circuit 95AK010 at the timing. Note that, assuming that the backup condition is satisfied by this supply start, the first event information creation processing unit (CPU 131) generates backup data ( hereinafter also referred to as power failure signal reception start data) is created as manufacturer confirmation data, stored in the first backup data buffer, and transferred to the backup memory board 14 by the first memory write processing unit (CPU 131) for backup ( The power failure signal reception start data may be backed up as store confirmation data or other data). The effect control microcomputer 120 to which the power interruption signal is supplied stops operation, and then the power is turned off when the DC voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined voltage (the voltage at which the effect control microcomputer 120 cannot operate). In other words, the effect control microcomputer 120 becomes non-operable from the timing of (a). Along with the reset operation, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply board to the main board 11 also drops, and the main board 11 is also powered off (non-operating) at a predetermined timing.

After that, at the timing of (c), the power supply from the power supply board is restored, and the DC voltage supplied from the power supply board to the effect control board 12 gradually increases, but the DC voltage exceeds 8V (d) A power-off signal is supplied until the timing. After the timing of (D) when the DC voltage exceeds 8V and the power interruption signal is turned off, the effect control microcomputer 120 starts operating. Furthermore, at the timing of (d), it is assumed that the backup condition is met by the end of reception of the power interruption signal, and the first occurrence event information creation processing unit (CPU 131) generates log information indicating the end of reception of the power interruption signal ( (including date and time information) (hereinafter also referred to as power failure signal reception end data) is created as data for manufacturer confirmation, stored in the first backup data buffer, and is processed by the first memory write processing unit (CPU 131). It is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and backed up. Along with the restoration of the power supply from the power supply board, the main board 11 also starts operating at a predetermined timing, and the effect control command (RAM clear notification command, setting change start command, etc.) at the time of power-on is the timing (E). is supplied to the effect control board 12 at .

23-5 shows a state in which the main board 11 is not cut off (power off) or the like, and the production control microcomputer 120 (production control board 12) is reset. The effect control microcomputer 120 restarts (resets) itself when there is a malfunction such as communication between the CPU 131 and the VDP 130 or communication between the CPU 131 and the effect data memory board or the like is malfunctioning. Also, the effect control microcomputer 120 may be reset due to noise on the reset terminal, accelerator error, or program error. In such a case, even if the effect control microcomputer 120 changes from operation → non-operation → operation, the DC voltage from the power supply board does not change at 12 V, the main board 11 also continues to operate, and the power interruption signal is turned off. remains (remains non-receiving).

When the entire pachinko game machine 1 in FIG. 23-4 is reset (similarly when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on) and when only the effect control microcomputer 120 in FIG. 23-5 is reset , The former receives a power interruption signal, but the latter differs in that it does not receive a power interruption signal. That is, depending on the presence or absence of backup of the power interruption signal reception start data and the power interruption signal reception end data, the power-on mode of the production control microcomputer 120 (normal power-on of the entire pachinko game machine 1 or power-on due to reset or whether it is a reset of only the effect control microcomputer 120).

(Processing after turning on the power of the production control microcomputer 120)
In response to (or after resetting) that the power supply of the effect control microcomputer 120 in the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the power failure detection circuit 95AK010 is turned on (that the DC voltage that allows the CPU 131 to operate is applied), the CPU 131 , the process shown in FIG. 23-6 may be executed.

In the process of FIG. 23-6, the CPU 131 first monitors the power interruption signal and determines whether or not the change of the power interruption signal from ON to OFF is detected (step 95AKS101). If detected (step 95AKS101; Yes), the process of backing up the power interruption signal reception end data is performed as described above (step 95AKS102).

If the change is not detected (step 95AKS101; Yes), after step 95AKS102, it is determined whether a power failure signal is being received (step 95AKS103). Return to step 95AK101. Therefore, as long as the power interruption signal is received, subsequent processing is not performed, and the effect control microcomputer 120 does not start up.

If the power interruption signal is not being received (step 95AKS103; No), the CPU 131 determines whether there is a backup of the power interruption signal reception end data and the power interruption signal reception start data (step 95AKS104). 95AKS 104; Yes) indicates whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a whole has been reset (reset with power off and on) or power has been turned on (normal power on). Waiting for reception of the effect control command (step 95AKS105), when the effect control command is received, backup data indicating log information at the time of power-on (for example, RAM clear time data at the time of RAM clear notification command reception, setting change start command reception set value change time data, set value confirmation time data at the time of receiving the setting confirmation start command, power-on time data, etc.) are backed up in the second backup storage unit 95AK004 as store confirmation data (step 95AKS106).

After that, the received command data indicating the log information including the effect control command at the time of power-on from the main board 11 is backed up in each of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 as data for manufacturer confirmation. (step 95AKS107). After that, the initialization processing (step S21) according to the effect control command from the main substrate 11 is performed (when the power failure recovery designation command is received, the power failure recovery processing is performed, etc.).

If there is no backup of the power interruption signal reception end data and the power interruption signal reception start data (step 95AKS104; No), only the effect control board 12 side (game control microcomputer 120) is reset, so the CPU 131 , an initial screen (for example, an image notifying that only the effect control board 12 side is reset) is displayed on the image display device 5 via the VDP 140 (step 95 AKS 111), and the effect control board 12 side (for game control Backup data showing log information (including date and time information) indicating that only the microcomputer 120) has been reset is backed up in each of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 as manufacturer confirmation data. (step 95AKS112). After that, initialization processing (step S21) is performed in response to the fact that the performance control command at the time of power-on is not supplied from the main board 11 (for example, performance execution is resumed based on the performance control command received thereafter).

In step 95AKS105, when the CPU 131 receives a command other than the effect control command at the time of power-on, or when the effect control command cannot be received for a predetermined period after waiting for reception, the effect control board 12 Only the DC voltage of is lowered and reset, and the main board 11 itself determines that the power supply is secured and the power supply is not cut off (even in this case, the power cutoff signal is supplied), and the manufacturer confirms that The data may be backed up in each of the 1-1st backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3rd backup storage unit 95AK003 (the store confirmation data is not backed up). Also, the processing of step 95AKS111 is executed. Thereafter, initialization processing (step S21) is performed in response to the fact that the effect control command at power-on is not supplied from the main board 11 (for example, if a command other than the effect control command at power-on is received, the command, and if the performance control command cannot be received for a predetermined period after waiting for reception, the performance execution is resumed based on the performance control command received thereafter).

By the above-described processing, the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether the effect control microcomputer 120 is in a power-on mode (normal power-on of the entire pachinko game machine 1 (including power-on with reset) , the main board 11 is power-on by resetting only the performance control microcomputer 120 that is not powered off). Both store confirmation data and manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up, and only the manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up when only the performance control microcomputer 120 is reset. Furthermore, in the case of the normal power-on of the entire pachinko game machine 1, as in steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107, the store confirmation data is backed up before the manufacturer confirmation data, so the backup priority of the store confirmation data is (Priority) is higher than the backup of manufacturer confirmation data.

(Effect of Characteristic Portion 95AK)
Conventionally, backup data was backed up without distinguishing between manufacturer confirmation data and store confirmation data, so store confirmation data was stored in the same process as manufacturer confirmation data (for example, Part of the store confirmation data is stored in each of the 1-1 backup storage units 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage units 95AK003 in the same manner as the manufacturer confirmation data). However, the processing time for backing up the manufacturer confirmation data may be long as described above. The possibility that the timing of disconnection (timing of power failure) overlaps with the backup period is higher than when the processing time for backing up the store confirmation data is shortened. Also, if the processing time for backing up is long, the occurrence timing of events such as only the effect control microcomputer 120 being reset tends to overlap. If the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off during the backup, or if only the performance control microcomputer 120 is reset, the store confirmation data will not be backed up properly, and the store confirmation data will indicate, for example, In some cases, log information could not be displayed on the maintenance history screen, etc. In such a case, the person in charge may have a sense of distrust because the log information that should be displayed in the maintenance history scene is not displayed. For example, when the attendant repeatedly turns on and off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, such an operation may be performed when the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is strange), conventionally, the power is turned on Sometimes the power is turned off while backing up the time data. date and time) may not be displayed on the maintenance history screen. In such a case, the attendant or the like has a sense of suspicion as to whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operating normally. In the characteristic portion 95AK, the time required for backing up the store confirmation data (transfer and writing time) is set shorter than that for the manufacturer confirmation data, so that the above-mentioned inconveniences are less likely to occur. Furthermore, the backup of store confirmation data has a higher priority than the backup of manufacturer confirmation data, and is performed preferentially. Even if data backup conflicts, the completion of the backup of the store confirmation data is not delayed). On the other hand, since the data for manufacturer confirmation is to be confirmed by the manufacturer (it cannot be confirmed by staff, etc., and it is more difficult to confirm than the data for store confirmation), it may be slightly damaged if the power is turned off during backup. The above problem does not occur even if the data is missing. In this way, by shortening the time required for backing up store verification data compared to backing up manufacturer verification data, the order of priority for backing up store verification data is set higher than the priority order for manufacturer verification data. By increasing the height (backup processing in FIG. 23-2, steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107 in FIG. 23-6), store confirmation data and manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up according to the purpose of use, and backup can be performed favorably. In addition, store confirmation data and manufacturer confirmation data are backed up differently (execution time, number of writes, and number of backup storage units are different), and store confirmation data is better than manufacturer confirmation data. Also, it is easy to check the log information indicated by each data (here, the former can be checked on the pachinko game machine 1, but the latter cannot be checked), so it is possible to make the use of each data appropriate. (The data that does not need to be confirmed at the store can be used as data for manufacturer confirmation, and the data that is confirmed by the staff at the store can be used as data for store confirmation), realizing a suitable backup.

In particular, when the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 and the 2nd backup storage unit 95AK004 are configured by one FRAM (registered trademark), data is stored in each of the storage units 95AK001 to 95AK003. It takes time to do this (because the data is serially stored in the order of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001→1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002→1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003). On the other hand, in the above, the store confirmation data is stored in fewer backup storage units than the manufacturer confirmation data (here, one, but it may be two), so there is no need to back up the store confirmation data. The time has been shortened. As a result, backup can be performed favorably.

In addition, it is preferable that the data amount of the store confirmation data is smaller than the data amount of the manufacturer confirmation data (the amount of data written to the backup storage unit at one time may be reduced), so that the store confirmation can be performed more efficiently. The time required for data backup can be shortened, and the backup can be performed favorably.

23-6, the effect control microcomputer 120 determines the mode of power-on of the effect control microcomputer 120 (either the pachinko game machine 1 is normally powered on, or the effect control microcomputer 120 is reset (whether the main board 11 or the like is powered off)), and when the power of the entire pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, store confirmation data and manufacturer confirmation data , and in the case of resetting only the effect control microcomputer 120, only the manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up. As a result, when only the effect control microcomputer 120 is reset, it is possible to prevent the reset from being displayed on the maintenance history screen by backing up the log information of the reset as data for shop confirmation. Normally, the reset of only the effect control microcomputer 120 is not directly related to the progress of the game and is often minor. By preventing this from being done, backup can be preferably performed.

(Modification)
Various modifications of the above configuration are possible. Modifications are exemplified below, and at least some of the following modifications may be combined.

(Modification 1)
The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 may perform, for example, the power interruption date and time recording process of FIG. 23-7. This process may be executed instead of or in addition to the date/time information storage process in step S78 (for example, after the date/time information storage process).

In this process, the CPU 131 first sets a temporary storage enable flag (provided in the external RAM 122 or internal RAM 133; the same applies to the flag and timer) indicating that the temporary storage of date and time information from the timer circuit 135 (RTC) is permitted. It is checked whether it is (ON) (step 012IWS841). If the temporary storage enabled flag is set, the CPU 131 checks whether the temporary storage timer for measuring the time for temporarily storing the date and time information from the timer circuit 135 (RTC) has timed out (step 012 IWS842). ). If the temporary storage timer has timed out, CPU 131 reads date and time information from timer circuit 135 (RTC) and stores the read date and time information in a temporary area provided in external RAM 122 or internal RAM 133 (step 012 IWS843). Also, the CPU 131 sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

Note that the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 every 100 ms. shall be overwritten and stored in the temporary area.

If the temporary storage enable flag is not set (N in step 012 IWS841), the CPU 131 determines whether it has received an initialization command (RAM clear notification command in the above case) or a recovery command (power failure recovery command in the above case). (Step 012IWS845). If the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received, the CPU 131 checks whether the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. Confirm whether or not (step 012IWS846). If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is not stored (N of step 012IWS846), the process proceeds to step 012IWS849. If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored (Y in step 012IWS846), the CPU 131 reads the date and time information stored in the temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133, and uses the read date and time information as the power failure date and time. Log information (manufacturer confirmation data and/or store confirmation data) in the log area (manufacturer confirmation data and/or store confirmation data storage area) provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 as is stored (step 012IWS847). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS849.

If neither the initialization designation command nor the recovery command has been received (N in step 012 IWS845), the CPU 131 receives other commands (however, such as the setting confirmation start command and the setting change start command, which are sent when the power is turned on). command) is received (step 012 IWS 848). If any other command is received, for example, if a variation pattern designation command or a display result designation command is received, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS849.

At step 012IWS849, the CPU 131 sets a temporary storage enable flag (step 012IWS849). Also, the CPU 131 sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

It should be noted that once the temporary storage enabled flag is set at step 012IWS849, it is maintained until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped or the system reset of the CPU 131 occurs. And, it shall be reset by the initialization process when the effect control main process is started due to the occurrence of power-on to the gaming machine, system reset, or the like.

FIG. 23-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recording timing of the log information of the date and time of power failure. As shown in FIG. 23-8, when the CPU 131 is starting up, the CPU 131 makes a determination of Y in step 012IWS841 of the power failure date and time recording process, and executes the processes of steps 012IWS842 to S844, thereby allowing the CPU 131 to wait 100 ms. The date and time information is temporarily stored in a temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 each time.

Next, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system reset of the CPU 131 occurs, the initialization process is executed and the temporary storage enable flag is reset. At step 012 IWS841 of the recording process, the determination is N, the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is not executed, and the last stored date and time information is maintained in the temporary area of the external RAM 122 or internal RAM 133 .

If the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then the power supply to the game machine is started, at least the initialization designation command or the recovery command should be received. Therefore, in this example, as shown in Fig. 23-8 (1), on the condition that the initialization specifying command or the recovery command is received, the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is read, and the read date and time The log information is stored in the log area with the power failure date and time as the information (Y in step 012IWS845, see step 012IWS847). After that, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information every 100 ms is resumed (see steps 012IWS849 and S850). However, in this example, the log information of the power-on date and time is also recorded (see step 012 IWS 203). Since there is a possibility that some kind of abnormality has occurred, in this case, the log information of the date and time of the power failure is not recorded (see step 012 IWS846 N).

On the other hand, if a system reset of the CPU 131 or the like occurs, the power supply to the game machine itself is not interrupted, and a power-on command such as an initialization designation command or a recovery command from the game control microcomputer 100 is issued. is not sent. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (2), if the command for specifying initialization or the command for restoration is not received, it is determined that the power failure of the gaming machine itself has not occurred. Then, the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is controlled so as not to record the log information as the power failure date and time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (2), based on the reception of other commands (except for commands transmitted when the power is turned on, such as the setting confirmation start command and the setting change start command), For example, when a variation pattern designation command or a display result designation command is received, a temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information every 100ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850).

If the configuration is such that the log information of the date and time of the power failure is recorded only based on the detection of the stoppage of the CPU 131, when the system reset of the CPU 131 occurs (the system of the CPU 131 temporarily resets due to the system reset of the CPU 131, etc.) The log information of the date and time of the power outage is also recorded in the same state as when the power supply is stopped), and the log information of the date and time of the power outage is recorded even though the power outage of the gaming machine itself did not occur. It may be recorded. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 23-8, the date and time when the CPU 131 is stopped is temporarily stored as a temporary power failure date and time, and a power-on command such as an initialization command or a recovery command is used. is officially recorded on the condition that a

In this example, it is determined that a power failure has occurred in the game machine itself, and the date and time of the power failure is recorded in the log information on the condition that an initialization command or a command for restoration has been received. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the date and time of the power failure may be recorded in the log information based on the reception of other commands transmitted when the power is turned on, such as a setting confirmation start command and a setting change start command.

Also, in this example, the log information is not recorded when the system reset of the CPU 131 or the like occurs instead of the power failure of the gaming machine itself, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, an area for recording log information for game machine manufacturers (storage unit for manufacturer confirmation data) is provided separately from an area for recording log information for amusement arcades (storage unit for store confirmation data). Alternatively, the date and time of occurrence of a system reset of the CPU 131, etc., may be recorded as log information in the area for the game machine maker.With such a configuration, the log information may be used as information for development by the game machine maker. can be used.

A gaming machine having the above configuration as an example is exemplified below.
Predetermined control means (for example, the main board 11 and the game control microcomputer 100 for controlling the progress of the game),
A specific control means (for example, CPU 131) that performs control based on information from a predetermined control means,
The specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means was stopped (for example, the CPU 131 executes steps 012IWS842 to S844 to store the data in a temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 every 100ms. store date and time information),
When the power supply to the specific control means is started, the information output by the predetermined control means that can specify that the power supply has started (for example, an initialization designation command (RAM clear notification command) or at the time of recovery A power failure date and time storage means (for example, a part that executes step 012IWS847 in the CPU 131) that can store the temporarily stored date and time as the power failure date and time based on the input of a command (power failure recovery designation command)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably store the power failure date and time.

The power failure date and time storage means does not store the temporarily stored date and time as the power failure date and time if it is not possible to input information that can specify that the power supply has started when power supply to the specific control means is started ( For example, the CPU 131 does not proceed to step 012IWS847 when N in step 012IWS845, and does not store the log information in the log area as the date and time of the power failure when it does not receive the initialization designation command or the recovery command. may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably store the power failure date and time.

It may be configured such that the date and time can be temporarily stored (for example, the date and time information is stored in a temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133) every predetermined timing (for example, 100 ms). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably store the power failure date and time.

Based on the fact that the power supply to the specific control means is stopped, the temporary storage of the date and time is stopped at each predetermined timing (for example, the CPU 131 resets the temporary storage enabled flag in the initialization process, thereby resetting the date and time information every 100 ms temporary storage is not executed), and based on the input of predetermined information (for example, initialization designation command, recovery command, other command) output by the predetermined control means, at each predetermined timing Even if it is configured to restart the temporary storage of date and time (for example, by executing step 012IWS849, the CPU 131 sets the temporary storage enable flag and restarts the temporary storage of date and time information every 100 ms). good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably store the power failure date and time.

The specific control means can store the date and time when power supply to the specific control means was started (for example, the CPU 131 records the power-on date and time as log information), and the power failure date and time storage means can store the date and time when the power supply was started. If the date and time is not stored, the temporarily stored date and time is not stored as the date and time of the power failure (for example, the CPU 131 does not proceed to step 012IWS847 when the result of step 012IWS846 is N, so that the power is turned on before the power failure occurs. If the log information of the date and time is not recorded, the log information of the power failure date and time is not recorded). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an abnormal storage state.

A gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") with different advantages for a player, and information generated during the game and history display means (for example, CPU 131 for displaying the screens of FIGS. 14 to 16) capable of identifiably displaying history information (for example, log information) of abnormalities related to games. And, initialization processing for initializing the storage contents of the storage area (eg, RAM clear) can be executed initialization processing execution means (eg, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103)) and , When the initialization process is executed, setting change processing execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically is provided with the CPU 103)), and the history display means can display in a identifiable manner that the initialization process has been executed when the initialization process has been executed and the setting change process has not been executed (for example, , RAM clear log information is displayed as shown in FIG. 15), and when initialization processing and setting change processing are executed, setting It is possible to display that the change process has been executed in a identifiable manner (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, only log information indicating the end of setting change ("Setting change is finished") is displayed). may be configured. According to such a configuration, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent history information from becoming difficult to check.

(Modification 2)
The effect control microcomputer 120 checks the validity of the storage contents (backup data) of each of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 at an appropriate timing such as when the power is turned on, parity, checksum Alternatively, in the case of verification by arbitrary error detection processing using hash values, etc., the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (backup storage area 95AK001A) → 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 (backup storage area 95AK002A) → 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 (backup storage area 95AK003A) → 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (backup storage area 95AK001B) → 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 (backup storage area 95AK002B) → 1-3 When the backup data is sequentially stored in the backup storage unit 95AK003 (backup storage area 95AK003B), if the latest backup data verification result is NG, new backup data is added to the NG backup data. may be overwritten, and then other backup storage units may be stored. For example, when backup data is stored in the backup storage areas 95AK001A to 95AK003A and no backup data is stored in the backup storage area 95AK001B and beyond, the backup data stored in the backup storage area 95AK003A is NG and the others are OK. In this case, new backup data may be stored from the backup storage area 95AK003A. In this case, the same data as the NG backup data (data considered to be OK) should be stored again in the backup storage area 95AK003A as new backup data. , the backup storage area 95AK003A to the backup storage area 95AK002B may store the same three backup data (hereafter, the three same backup data are stored in the 1-3 backup storage section 95AK003 → the 1-1 backup storage section 95AK003). 95AK001→1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002). Here, if new backup data is restored (overwritten) from the backup storage area 95AK001A, there is a risk that the OK backup data will be overwritten with the NG backup data. It is possible to prevent such a risk.

(Modification 3)
Production control microcomputer 120 executes the process of backing up the manufacturer confirmation data (transfer to backup memory board 14, etc.). It may be written to a storage unit that can be backed up, and in that case, the writing process (the same applies to the manufacturer confirmation data), and the second backup process is a process of backing up the store confirmation data. , the processing itself other than the data to be backed up may be different. At least one of the amount of data to be written and the amount of data to be written may be different.

(Modification 4)
The effect control microcomputer 120 may transfer the store confirmation data and/or the manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14 without passing through the first backup data buffer or the first backup data buffer. In addition, the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the fourth backup storage unit 95AK004 are provided in the production control board 12, and the production control microcomputer 120 stores store confirmation data and/or manufacturer confirmation data in the first backup data buffer. Alternatively, data may be written to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 4th backup storage unit 95AK004 with or without the first backup data buffer.

(Configuration of Characteristic Portion 95AK)
Hereinafter, a gaming machine will be described with the characteristic portion 95AK as an example.

A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.),
Control means (for example, production control microcomputer 120, etc.),
Storage means capable of storing backup data (for example, backup memory board 14 (particularly, 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to second backup storage unit 95AK004), etc.),
The control means is
A first backup process (for example, transferring the manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14) for storing the first backup data (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the first backup condition. processing of transfers, etc.), and
A second backup process (for example, a backup memory) having a shorter execution time than the first backup process for storing second backup data (for example, store confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the second backup condition. transfer of store confirmation data to the circuit board 14, etc.) is given a different priority from the first backup process (priority of process execution, and when the first backup process and the second backup process conflict, which one is selected)? (including the order of whether to execute first) (for example, the backup of store confirmation data is performed in a shorter execution time than the backup of manufacturer confirmation data, and the priority of processing is high, etc.),
game machine.

In the above, the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 that executes effects based on commands from the main board 11 that controls the progress of the game operates as the control means. In addition to the performance control board 12, the present invention is applied to a game machine having a second performance control board that executes a performance in cooperation with the performance control board 12 by a command from the performance control board, and the second performance control is performed. The control means may be applied to a computer, CPU, or the like mounted on a board.

The control means and storage means may be provided on the same substrate. In such a case, the first backup process and the second backup process may be processes for directly writing backup data to the storage means. Of the storage means, the portion that stores the first backup data and the portion that stores the second backup data may be parts of the same storage device such as FRAM (registered trademark), or may be two different storage devices. It may be formed from each of the storage devices. A set of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the backup memory board 14 is regarded as a control means, and the first backup processing and the second backup processing are performed by the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 or the second It may be regarded as a process of transferring and writing backup data to the backup storage unit 95AK004 (even in such a case, the execution time of the second backup process is shorter in the characteristic part 95AK).

The first backup condition and the second backup condition may be the same condition or different conditions. The backup condition may be, for example, a condition that triggers creation of backup data (occurrence of an event desired to be recorded by log information, etc.). Backup data may be created (recorded in RAM or the like) when the backup condition is satisfied, and the created backup data may be stored in the storage means at the timing when a power failure may occur (" Expressions such as "store the first backup data in the storage means based on the establishment of the first backup condition" include such aspects). The first backup data and the second backup data may be the same data (but preferably different data). The first backup data may be, for example, at least one backup data to be the manufacturer confirmation data. The second backup data may be at least one backup data that becomes the store confirmation data.

The execution time of the first backup process and the execution time of the second backup process may be only the period during which the backup data is actually transferred or written, or the backup data may be transferred in a plurality of times, such as for each timer interrupt. Alternatively, when writing, the period may include the time between each time. Also, the execution time may be a period from the satisfaction of the backup condition to the end of the backup (it may be considered that the backup process is performed during the entire period from the satisfaction of the backup condition to the end of the backup).

Methods for making the execution time of the second backup process shorter than the execution time of the first backup process include (1) making the data amount of the second backup data smaller than the data amount of the first backup data, and (2) The number of storage destinations for the second backup data is made smaller than the number of storage destinations for the first backup data; It can be realized by

It is arbitrary which of the first backup process and the second backup process has a higher priority (for example, steps 95AKS003 to 95AKS010 may be followed by steps 95AKS001 to 95AKS002).

According to the above configuration, by making the execution time of the second backup process shorter than the execution time of the first backup process, during the second backup process power failure, etc. (game machine power off, voltage drop, etc.) power off of only the control means or resetting of the entire game machine) (the possibility that the second backup process and power failure etc. overlap in time) is lower than that of the first backup process. (For example, the possibility that the transfer of backup data to the backup memory board 14 and powering off only the control means overlap, and the possibility that writing the backup data and powering off the game machine overlap) are reduced). In other words, the possibility of failure of the second backup process due to power failure or the like occurring in the middle is lower than that of the first backup process. Also, since the first backup process and the second backup process are executed with different priorities, both processes are not executed simultaneously. Therefore, when the first backup process and the second backup process are executed at the same time, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the execution time of the second backup process is extended due to the execution of the first backup process. The possibility of power failure etc. occurring in As described above, at least the second backup data can be backed up with a lower possibility of failure (than the first backup data), and a suitable backup is realized.

It should be noted that the execution priority of the second backup process should be higher than that of the first backup process. As a result, after the second backup condition is met, the second backup process can be executed earlier than the first backup process, and the possibility of power interruption or the like occurring after the second backup condition is met until the second backup process is completed can be reduced. backup is realized.

Instead of or in addition to the configuration of the control means, the control means
A first backup process (for example, transferring the manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14) for storing the first backup data (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the first backup condition. processing of transfers, etc.), and
Different from the first backup process of storing the second backup data (for example, store confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the second backup condition different number of copies, different priority of processing, different amount of backup data written, etc.), second backup processing (for example, processing of transferring shop confirmation data to the backup memory board 14, etc.) can be executed. ,
The information indicated by the second backup data stored in the storage means is easier to confirm than the information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means (for example, the log indicated by the store confirmation data). The information can be confirmed on the image display device 5, but the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data can only be read by the manufacturer's reading device, etc.),
You may do so.

The ease of "confirmation" is, for example, the amount of time and effort required to check the information indicated by each backup data (the less time and effort, the easier the confirmation). The log information indicated by the data for manufacturer can be confirmed by the image display device 5, but the log information indicated by the data for manufacturer confirmation can be read only by the reading device of the manufacturer, and the log information can be confirmed only through the reading device. In this case, the log information indicated by the store confirmation data is easier to confirm because it does not take time to read. For example, the second backup data is stored so that the information indicated by the second backup data can be displayed on display means or the like (confirmable on the gaming machine) based on the operation of the gaming machine by an attendant or the like. 1 backup data, the information indicated by the first backup data can only be confirmed by reading the first backup data from the game machine (that is, only with a device other than the game machine) (cannot be confirmed by operating the game machine) ) (the above is also an example), and in this case also, the information indicated by the second backup data is easier to check because it does not take time to read. Alternatively, the manufacturer verification data may be encrypted and stored, and the shop verification data may be stored without encryption. is easy to confirm.

The first backup process and the second backup process are different in process itself other than the first backup data and the second backup data to be stored in the storage means.
You may do so.

The first backup process and the second backup process each include, as processes themselves, an execution time, an area for storing the first backup data and the second backup data, and a process priority (process execution priority). , and at least one of the write amount of backup data at one time is different,
You may do so.

According to each of the above configurations, the first backup process and the second backup process are differentiated, and the handling of the first backup data and the second backup data after backup (the easiness of confirmation of the information indicated by each data) is differentiated. Therefore, backup processing can be preferably executed.

Information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means is not reported on the gaming machine (for example, log information indicated by manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1),
The information indicated by the second backup data stored by the storage means can be notified on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the store confirmation data is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed. The notification may be notification by voice or the like. Further, when the execution time of the second backup process is shorter than that of the first backup process, with the above configuration, the second backup data indicating information that can be notified can be backed up with a low probability of failure. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the information indicated by the 2 backup data is not reported due to failure of the backup process even though it should be reported, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

Based on the second backup data stored in the storage means, information indicated by the second backup data (for example, log information indicated by the store confirmation data) can be displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5, etc.) Display control means (for example, production control microcomputer 120 etc.)
The information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data) is not displayed on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on pachinko machine 1, etc.),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed. Further, when the execution time of the second backup process is shorter than that of the first backup process, with the above configuration, the second backup data indicating information that can be displayed can be backed up with a low probability of failure. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the information indicated by the 2 backup data is not notified due to the failure of the backup process even though it should be displayed, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

The storage means
a first storage area in which the first backup data is written and the second backup data is not written (for example, the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003, etc.);
A second storage area (for example, a second backup storage unit 95AK004, etc.) in which the second backup data is written and the first backup data is not written,
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the storage area for the first backup data and the storage area for the second backup data can be separated, so that the backup process can be performed favorably.

The first storage area has a first number (eg, three) of storage areas (eg, 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003, etc.) in which the same first backup data is written. has
The second storage area has a second number (e.g., one) of storage areas (e.g., second backup storage unit 95AK004, etc.) that is smaller than the first number in which the same second backup data is written.
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the execution time of the second backup process can be reliably made shorter than that of the first backup process, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

a first control means (for example, the main substrate 11, etc.);
A second control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 120, etc.), which is the control means,
The second control means executes the first backup process and the second backup process when only the second control means of the first control means and the second control means is reset. No (for example, in step 95AKS112, the data for manufacturer confirmation is backed up, but the store confirmation data is not backed up, etc.);
You may do so.

Although the determination of the reset is performed by the power interruption signal in the above description, it may be performed by other methods. For example, the reset may be determined by a command or the like that is first transmitted from the first control means to the second control means after reset (the command is a command other than the command that is normally transmitted after reset (variable command). pattern designating command, etc.), it is determined that only the second control means has been reset).

According to the above configuration, when only the second control means out of the first control means and the second control means is reset, the second backup process with a short execution time is not executed or the second backup process, which is easy to confirm, is not executed. Since the second backup processing for the backup data is not executed, the backup processing can be preferably executed (for example, resetting only the second control means due to the second backup data is a minor defect. (e.g., it is possible to avoid unnecessarily notifying that only the second control means has been reset).

The second control means executes the first backup process and the second backup process when both the first control means and the second control means are reset (for example, steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107). ),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed. When both the first control means and the second control means are reset, the reset is usually assumed, and the fact can be firmly backed up, and the backup process can be suitably executed.

When the voltage supplied to the second control means is below a predetermined value, a signal supply means (for example, power disconnection detection circuit 95AK010, etc.),
The second control means determines whether both the first control means and the second control means are reset based on whether or not the predetermined signal is supplied after the power is turned on. It is possible to identify whether only has been reset (for example, processing after 95AKS104),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the reset control means can be specified by the predetermined signal, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.), which includes control means (for example, performance control microcomputer 120, etc.) and a backup device. storage means (for example, backup memory board 14, etc.) capable of storing data; is stored in the storage means (for example, processing for transferring manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14, etc.), and based on the establishment of the second backup condition, the second backup A second backup process (for example, a process of transferring store confirmation data to the backup memory board 14) whose execution time is shorter than the first backup process for storing data (for example, store confirmation data) in the storage means. ) can be executed in a priority order different from that of the first backup process (for example, the backup of store confirmation data is performed in a shorter execution time than the backup of manufacturer confirmation data, and the priority of the process is high, etc.), and furthermore, an effect executing means (for example, a microprocessor for effect control 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B) for displaying a moving image with a character image added. ), a first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11) for storing data relating to moving images, a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13) for storing data relating to character images, and data in the first storage area and a character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) that controls the display of a moving image using the data in the second storage area. For example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.), and the data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component ( For example, a display style set by text display setting information), and the character image control means controls, during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the Gaming machines in which the first component and the second component can be changed (see, eg, FIG. 33-7) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed. Appropriate display control is also possible.

In other words, by making the content and priority of the backup data to be stored differ according to the backup conditions, for example, the backup of store confirmation data can be performed in a shorter execution time than the backup of manufacturer confirmation data, and the processing can be performed in a shorter time. A character image control means can suitably execute a backup process such as restoring power as much as possible when a power failure occurs while the gaming machine is installed in a store by setting the priority to be high. Therefore, by changing the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the control load for displaying the moving image increases and the recognition of the character image becomes difficult. Appropriate display control can be performed while preventing difficulties as much as possible. In addition, when a power outage occurs when the player's expectations are high, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to initialization due to failure to recover. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine that can appropriately cope with the occurrence of a power failure and easily recognize displayed character images when installed in a game arcade.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of suitably executing a backup process and appropriately controlling display, a gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) is provided. , effect execution means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B) for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added; A first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11) for storing data, a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13) for storing data relating to character images, and a moving image using the data in the first storage area. Moving image control means for controlling display (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.); image renderer 91AK146, etc.), and the data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, set by text display setting information). The character image control means controls the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. A game machine that can change elements (see for example FIG. 33-7). Examples of the form examples of these gaming machines will be described below as other form examples.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 of another embodiment (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 24 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 24), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as special identification information of a plurality of types is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 25). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 24, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 25), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 24). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 24) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 25).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 25).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 9013 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 9013 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 9013, and the lamp control board 9014, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903; Yes), initialization processing (step S908) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904; Yes). S905). In step S905, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S907). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the recovery time from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it is determined that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. , the screen is displayed for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the register of CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set (step S9011) so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the odds have changed, etc.) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S9025). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, normal symbol process is executed (step S9026). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 27 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning judgment processing (step S90101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control process of step S9027 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S90115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot open post-processing of step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pretreatment of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S9072). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9073). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9073; No), the process of step S9073 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S9073 (step S9073; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S9074), and command analysis processing is executed (step S9075). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing command analysis processing in step S9075, production control process processing is executed (step S9076). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S9076 (step S9077), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S9073. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S9073.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S9076 of FIG. 29 as the effect control process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 first executes pre-reading notice setting processing (step S90161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S90161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S90170 to S90177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S90171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Incidentally, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can check the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by a staff member of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed together with the main board 11 in the board case. The lock switch and setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. Each of the first to fourth display units of the display monitor is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display portions of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right hitting lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low probability high base state or a big hit game state as a time saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIGS. 31-1(A) and 31-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. Of these, FIG. 31-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "jackpot" assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/1 when the set value is 4). 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, and 1/140 when the setting value is 4. 1/120 for 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (eg, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state will be the same value. A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied. The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as a "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is " The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

FIGS. 31-2 to 31-5 show numerical ranges of hit determination values assigned to "big wins" and "minor wins" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 31-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 31-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state. FIG. 31-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 31-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 31-2, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 31-3, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1674) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 31-4, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 31-5, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the variable probability state, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the judgment included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit judgment value of 1020 The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as the small hit. As a numerical range of values, a variable display result is determined.

In each display result determination table, if the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the set value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol wins (big hit). It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 31-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of a big win, the easier determination of a specific kind of big win, etc.). It may be arranged such that the smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characterizing portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 31-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) and initial settings such as settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, the process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A , the process proceeds to step S3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame opened (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), set value confirmation processing (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the provisional set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. This is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the lighting of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing or setting the set value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being checked. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed). (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by a cold start or restored to the state before the power failure (started by a hot start) depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, for example. ), perform the corresponding processing (step S10A), and terminate the processing within the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) to FXXX) may be cleared.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display unit, second display unit, third display unit, and fourth display unit that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the sections. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the set value can be stored in a identifiable manner. can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B Notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or the recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value. become.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be a numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value. It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range of up to. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 31-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variable state It is sufficient to judge no. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 31-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is about double). On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 31-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) that is different from the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It should be determined whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
In the characteristic portion 60AK, the number-of-times notification effect is executed at a predetermined ratio during the execution of the variable display. In the number-of-times notification effect, the number of times the operation effect is executed is notified. The operation effects are effects in which various notices, notifications, and suggestions are made when the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is detected. The operation performance of the characteristic part 60AK includes a notice performance for notifying that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state, a value notification performance for notifying whether or not the variable probability state will be controlled after the jackpot game state is ended, and a pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加A setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in is included as an executable effect.

FIG. 32-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop pattern and the like are determined (step 60AKS011). The final stop pattern is a fixed decorative pattern as a display result of variable display of decorative patterns, and is a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 or a variable display result notification command. It can be determined based on variable display content, such as the display result of the display. A variation pattern specification command and a variable display result notification command are transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 based on the setting by the variation pattern setting processing of the special symbol process processing. The variable display contents corresponding to the display results of the variable pattern and variable display are "non-reach (losing)", "normal reach (losing)", "super reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", "probability ( jackpot)" should be included. If the variable display content is any one of "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", and "super reach (loss)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "loss". If the variable display content is either "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". In addition, when the variable display content is "normal reach (loss)" and when the variable display content is "super reach (loss)", the variable display content is collectively referred to as "reach (loss)". When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" and when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", the variable display content is collectively called "big hit".

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. If the variable display content is "Reach (Loss)", if the variable display content is "Normal Reach (Loss)", the "Normal" variation pattern will be used to create a reach effect, and the variable display content will be "Super Reach ( In the case of "losing)", a reach effect is executed according to the "super" variation pattern. When the variable display content is ``non-probability variation (big hit)'', the display result of the variable display is ``big hit'', and the jackpot type corresponds to ``non-probability variation'', and the game state after the end of the big win game state is shortened. state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big hit)", the display result of the variable display is "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big win game state is the variable probability state corresponding to the "variable probability" of the jackpot type. Become. When the game state is a probability variable state, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" increases, and by being easily controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state, the game is played more than the normal state or the time saving state. A game value advantageous to the player is given.

The final stop pattern is determined so that when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R have different (mismatched) decorative patterns. be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared left finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, the determination is performed. Of the decorative symbols, the left finalized decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Next, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Of the symbols, the right finalized decoration symbol to be stop-displayed in the "right" decoration symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Among the symbols, the medium-determined decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

The final stop pattern is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R when the variable display content is "reach (loss)". be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left/right determined pattern updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared left/right determined pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, determination is performed. Among the decorative patterns, the decorative patterns having the same pattern number and displayed stopped together in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc., a fixed decorative pattern Among them, the medium-determined decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may not be a jackpot combination but be a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

The final stop pattern is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)". are determined to be the same (matching) decoration pattern. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to a table for determining a big hit fixed pattern prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, The decorative symbols having the same symbol number to be stop-displayed together in 5C and 5R may be determined. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the decorative symbols showing odd numbers) and the probability variable patterns (for example, the decorative symbols indicating odd numbers) should be determined as the fixed decorative symbols. In the promotion performance during the big win, after a combination of decorative symbols (non-variable big win combination) that reminds the player of the big win but not the variable probability state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the game is in the state of the big win or in the state of the big win game. It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variable (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", in step 60AKS011, it is determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. may be broken. In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and that control to the variable probability state is made, By variably displaying (re-varying) the decoration patterns again and stop-displaying the decoration patterns of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variation patterns, the player can be recognizably informed that the probability variation state is controlled. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are changed again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is determined in step 60AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like, operation effect determination processing is executed (step 60AKS012). By the operation effect determination process, determination and setting for executing the operation effect and the number of times notification effect are performed. Then, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step 60AKS013). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, an operation production control pattern, other notice production control patterns, and the like. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared operation effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the operation effect determination process of step 60AKS012. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the operation production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be. When the production control pattern is determined, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set. (step 60AKS014). Also, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step 60AKS015). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step 60AKS013 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is set (step 60AKS016). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the pending number "1" is erased (digested), and other pending numbers "2" to The pending display in the display portion corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 60AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 32-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation effect determination process executed in step 60AKS012 of the variable display start setting process. In the operation effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect permission condition is established (step 60AKS021). The effect permission condition may be determined in advance as a condition under which execution of the operation effect is permitted. For example, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP ready-to-win which is super reach is executed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command, the effect permission condition may be established. Moreover, it is good also as one of the production|presentation permission conditions that it is a high probability high base state in a probability variable state. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect of the SP ready-to-win is executed in the high-probability-high base state, the effect permission condition may be established.

In the characteristic portion 60AK, SP reach A and SP reach B are prepared in advance as reach effects of super reach. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having different effects from each other. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having a common effect mode. When the display result of the variable display is "big win", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal ready-to-win. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a "big win", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is higher than the ratio of executing to-win effect of SP ready-to-win A. When the display result of the variable display is "losing", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. Further, when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A becomes higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B. According to the execution ratio of such a reach production, among the reach productions of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, the reach production of SP reach B was executed more than the case where the reach production of SP reach A was executed. In this case, the expectation of a big hit increases.

If the effect permission condition is not satisfied at step 60AKS021 (step 60AKS021; No), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the effect permission condition is established (step 60AKS021; Yes), the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined (step 60AKS022). The operation effect is executed according to whether or not it is to be executed, for example, by referring to an operation effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the operation effect execution. and the number of executions if executed. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining execution of the operation effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS022, the presence or absence and the number of operation effects are set to "no execution" in which no operation effect is executed, or "executed 5 times" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 5, and the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times. One of "10 executions" is determined.

Based on the determination result of step 60AKS022, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "not execute" that the operation effect is not executed (step 60AKS023). If it is determined that there is no execution (step 60AKS023; Yes), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no "execution" (step 60AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is "big hit" (step 60AKS024). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (step 60AKS024; Yes), the setting suggestion number of times is determined (step 60AKS025). The setting suggestion count indicates the number of operation effects executed as the setting suggestion effect among the plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS025, the setting suggestion frequency is determined by referring to a setting suggestion frequency determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion frequency. do it. Numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of setting suggestions may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . At step 60AKS025, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable", the setting suggestion frequency is determined to be zero. When the jackpot type is "variable probability", it depends on whether the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is "five times" or "ten times" is ten times. Therefore, the number of setting suggestions is determined at different ratios.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS025 is 0 (step 60AKS026). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS026; No), a suggested setting pattern is determined (step 60AKS027). The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the suggested setting pattern, and for each execution of the operation presentation. Any setting suggestion pattern may be determined among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

When the determination result in step 60AKS025 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS026; Yes), or after determining the suggested setting pattern in step 60AKS027, the number of times of value reporting is determined (step 60AKS028). The number of times of value notification indicates the number of times of operation effects that are executed as value notification effects, among a plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS028, based on the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of times of value notification, the number of times of value notification is determined by referring to a table for determining the number of times of value notification, which is stored in advance and prepared in ROM 121. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of times of notification of value may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS028, the value is calculated at a different rate depending on whether the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "five times" or "ten times". The number of notifications is determined.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS028 is 0 (step 60AKS029). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS029; No), the value notification pattern is determined (step 60AKS030). The value notification pattern is determined as one of a plurality of value notification patterns based on whether the jackpot type is ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation'' for each execution number of operation effects. It should be done.

When it is determined that the display result of the variable display is not "big hit" at step 60AKS024 (step 60AKS024; No), or when the determination result at step 60AKS028 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS029; Yes), or After the value notification pattern is determined in step 60AKS030, the number of times of notice effects is set (step 60AKS031). The number of notice effects indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as notice effects among the plurality of operation effects. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the value notification effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed, so the number of executions of the operation effect may be set as the number of advance notice effects. When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the remaining number of times after subtracting the setting suggestion number and the value notification number among the number of times of execution of the operation presentation may be set as the number of advance notice presentations. After step 60AKS031, after determining the notice effect pattern (step 60AKS032), the operation effect determination process is terminated. The notice effect pattern is determined by referring to a notice effect pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the notice effect pattern. Any one of the plurality of advance notice effect patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the announcement effect pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 32-3 shows an example of whether or not there is an operation effect and the number of times determined by step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process. At step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process, the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined, for example, at a rate corresponding to the content of the ready-to-win effect. The content of the reach performance is determined corresponding to the display result of the variable display and the variation pattern, and is "SP reach A (big hit)", "SP reach B (big hit)", "SP reach A (loss)", "SP reach". B (losing)" should be included. If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP reach A (losing)" or "SP reach B (losing)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "losing". When the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", SP ready-to-win A ready-to-win effect is executed as a super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is either "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 32-3, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the number of executions of the operation presentation is five times at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is "loss". or "executed 10 times" is determined to be 10 times. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 50/100. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 20/100. Thus, when the operation performance is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state is increased compared to when the operation performance is not executed, and the degree of expectation for the big win is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 32-3, when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-B is executed, the number of times of execution of the operation effect is set to 10 at a higher rate than when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A is executed. It is decided to "execute 10 times". For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 40/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 60/100 when the number of times to execute the operation effect is 10 times. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 10/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 20/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. Of the ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, when the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-reach B is executed than when to-win performance of SP ready-to-win A is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher. Therefore, when the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of execution of the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-win B, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the ready-to-win performance of SP to-win A, is increased. It effectively raises people's expectations. Further, as the number of executions of the operation presentation increases, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state increases, and the degree of expectation for big win increases.

FIG. 32-4 shows an example of setting suggestion count determination in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 32-4(A) shows an example of determination of setting suggestion times in the case of "executed five times" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 32-4(B) shows an example of determination of setting suggestion times in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation presentation is 10 times. At step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, the setting suggestion number is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the jackpot type. The jackpot types include ``non-probability variation'' when not controlled to the probability variation state and ``probability variation'' when controlled to the probability variation state according to the game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. When controlled to the variable probability state, the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" at a higher rate than when not controlled to the variable probability state, and it is easy for the player to be controlled again to the big win game state as an advantageous state. Advantageous game value is given.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 32-4, when the jackpot type is "probability variable", it is determined that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable". For example, in both cases of “5 times execution” and “10 times execution”, if the jackpot type is “non-probability variation”, the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 100/100. Suggestion production is not executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "Variable Probability", it is possible to determine the number of set suggestion times other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "5 times execution" and the case of "10 times execution". More specifically, in the case of "5 times execution", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 70/100. 30/100. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 10/100, and the decision rate of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 15/100. , the determination ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 2 is 20/100, the determination ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 3 is 25/100, and the determination rate of setting the suggested number of times to 4 is 30/100. Therefore, when the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect with the number of times of setting suggestion other than 0 is increased. In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any of 2 to 4, which is the number of setting suggestions that are not determined in the case of 5 times, and more setting suggestions. The rate at which the production is executed is increased.

In this way, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", it is possible to execute setting suggestion production at a higher rate than "non-probability variation", so it is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" In the case of "probability variation", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big win game state. In addition, only in the case of "probable variation", which is the most advantageous jackpot type among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is performed. become viable. Among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, within a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance as a setting suggestion performance at a predetermined rate. In the range controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type "unprobability variable" with a low advantage, a restriction may be provided as a limit that the operation performance as the setting suggestive performance is not executed. Alternatively, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, in a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance at a high rate. On the other hand, in the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "unprobable variation" of the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage, there is a limit as a limit that the operation production that becomes the setting suggestion production can be executed at a low rate. may

FIG. 32-5 shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this configuration example, setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. Suggestion contents and corresponding characters are determined differently according to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content is the content of the set value suggested according to the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. The corresponding character is a character indicated by an effect image displayed when the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC1, corresponding to the case where the set value is an odd number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation with odd number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH1. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, corresponding to the case where the set value is an even number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation for even number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH2. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC3, corresponding to the case where the set value is high setting (large value) and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high setting, high degree of expectation", and the corresponding character is the character CH3. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, corresponding to the case where the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more, the content of the suggestion is "the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more", and the corresponding character is the character CH4. In the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC5, corresponding to the case where the set value is determined to be the highest value of 6, the suggested content is "the highest set value is determined" and the corresponding character is the character CH5. In this way, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 makes it possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is the most advantageous for the player.

FIG. 32-6 shows an example of setting suggestion patterns determined by step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 32-6(A) shows an example of determination in the case of the final operation effect in a plurality of operation effects. Figure 32-6 (B1) and Figure 32-6 (B2) show an example of determination in the case of an operation effect other than the final one in a plurality of operation effects, and Figure 32-6 (B1) shows a setting suggestion pattern FIG. 32-6(B2) is an example of determination when 60AKC4 is undetermined as a usage pattern, and FIG. 32-6 (B2) is an example of determination when setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined as a usage pattern. In step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process, setting suggestion patterns, which are usage patterns, are determined at a rate corresponding to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 from the final operation effect to the previous operation effect. Here, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 corresponds to the final operation effect, and when the setting value is 6, the determination ratio is 5/100, and in other cases, the determination ratio is 0/100. It is impossible to decide. Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, which suggests that the setting value is the highest in the player's advantage, is the final operation effect. , and is not executed as an operation effect other than the final time. As a result, of the first timing and the second timing at which setting suggestion effects can be executed a plurality of times, the second timing, which is later than the first timing, has a higher rate of advantage for the player than the first timing. is the highest setting value.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 32-6, when the setting value is 2 or more corresponding to the final operation effect, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100. Further, if the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is undetermined for the operation effects other than the final round, and if the set value is 2 or more, the determination ratio of the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100. On the other hand, if the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined for the operation effects other than the final round, the determination ratio of the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 becomes 0/100 regardless of the set value, and determination is impossible. . Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is executed once at a predetermined ratio as one of the operation effects, and then executed again or repeatedly in the same mode. prevent it from being done. In this way, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is performed at a predetermined rate within a range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has not yet been executed. becomes executable.

On the other hand, in the case where the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not executed in the range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been executed. A limit is set as a limit. Further, since the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed only as the final operation effect, it is executed as the final setting suggestion effect when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times. In the range where the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is performed, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed at a predetermined rate, while the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is not executed in the range where it is executed as the setting suggestion effect other than the final episode. Restrictions are provided as limitations. In this way, when an operation effect that is a setting-suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting-suggestion effect by the setting-suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 is performed at a predetermined rate within the range of being executed as one setting-suggestion effect. While it can be executed, there is a limit as a limit that it becomes impossible to execute within the range where it is executed as a setting suggestion effect multiple times. When an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, among the setting suggestion effects by the plurality of setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5, the range of setting suggestion effects by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC3 is performed in the same mode. While it may be executed, within the range of the setting suggestion rendering by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5, there is a limit as a limit that it is not executed in the same mode.

FIG. 32-7 shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 32-7(A) shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "executed five times" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 32-7(B) shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times. At step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, the number of value notifications is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the number of setting suggestions. The setting suggestion number is determined by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process to be 0 or 1 if the number of times the operation effect is executed is "executed 5 times", and is 0 if the number of times the operation effect is executed is "executed 10 times". to 4.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 32-7, the value notification frequency is determined so that the value notification effect is executed when the set suggestion frequency is other than zero. For example, in the case of "executed 5 times", if the set suggested number of times is 1, the determination ratio of the number of times of value notification to 1 is 100/100, and the value notification effect is always executed once. In the case of "execute 10 times", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0 (one of 1 to 4), the value notification number is determined to be one of 1 to 4 at a predetermined rate. More specifically, in the case of "10 executions", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 55/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 2 is 55/100. 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 15/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 10/100. Therefore, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, the set value can be suggested by the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggesting performance can be executed at a predetermined ratio when controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states. In this case, it is possible to notify that a game value advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, and to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the range in which the operation effect as the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect as the value notification effect is not executed. There is a limit as a limit that cannot be done. In addition, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a high rate in the range where the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect that is the value notification effect is not executed. A limit may be provided as a limit to what can be done with

In the determination example shown in FIG. 32-7, the number of times of value notification is determined so as to provide a case where the value notification effect is not executed when the number of setting suggestions is zero. For example, in the case of “five times execution”, if the setting suggestion number is 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 30/100. be. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the set suggestion number is 0, the determination ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 0 is 10/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 15/100, The determination ratio of 2 times of value notification is 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 25/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 30/100. As a result, when the operation effect is executed a plurality of times, the operation effect such as the setting suggestion effect or the value notification effect is not executed, and after the operation effect is completed, the display result of the variable display is "big hit". ” can be provided. Therefore, during the execution of the variable display, even if the number of times of execution of the operation effect reaches the number of times notified by the number of times notification effect and the execution of the operation effect ends, there is a possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit". is left, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from being lost due to the end of the operation presentation.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 32-7, it is possible to determine the number of times of value notification other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "executed 5 times" and the case of "executed 10 times". Then, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the number of times of value notification is set to other than 0 so that the ratio of execution of the value notification effect is increased. For example, in the case of "executed five times", the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 1 other than 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. On the other hand, in the case of "executed 10 times", the ratio of setting suggestion times to values other than 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestions to 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. In the case of "executed 5 times", if the setting suggestion number is 0, the ratio of the value notification number being determined to be 1 other than 0 is higher than the ratio of being determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. expensive. In the case of "executed 10 times", even if the set suggestion number is 0, the rate of the value notification number being determined to be other than 0 is higher than the rate of being determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination processing. . With such a setting, in the case of "execution of 10 times", in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is larger than that of "execution of 5 times", the rate at which the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0 increases, and the value notification effect is executed. increase the rate of In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any one of 2 to 4, which is the number of value notification times that is not determined in the case of 5 times, and more value notification is possible. What is necessary is just to make it possible to raise the ratio which production|presentation is performed.

According to steps 60AKS025 and 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, in the case of "executed 5 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be 0, and the ratio of neither the setting suggestion effect nor the value notification effect to be executed is high. In the case of "executed 10 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be other than 0, and the ratio of both the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect to be executed increases. In this way, as the number of executions of the operation effects increases, the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effects and the value notification effects may be increased. Further, when the number of executions of operation effects is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, setting suggesting effects and value notification effects may be executed at a higher rate than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect according to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

FIG. 32-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step 60AKS041). At this time, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, the variable display time It should be determined that it has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 60AKS041; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 32-8, it is determined whether or not it is the number of times notification effect period (step 60AKS042). The number-of-times notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that it is the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the number-of-times notification effect (step 60AKS043). By the control of step 60AKS043, it becomes possible to execute the number-of-times notification effect for performing the notification corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

If it is determined at step 60AKS042 that it is not the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS043, it is determined whether or not it is the notice effect period (step 60AKS044). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The notice effect period corresponding to the operation effect may be determined in advance so as to be later than the number-of-times notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the advance notice effect period (step 60AKS044; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step 60AKS045). By the control of step 60AKS045, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the advance notice effect.

When it is determined that it is not the advance notice effect period at step 60AKS044 (step 60AKS044; No), or after performing the control of step 60AKS045, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046). Reach production period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. The ready-to-win effect period may be set so as to come later than the advance notice effect period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the advance notice effect period. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 60AKS047). By the control of step 60AKS047, the ready-to-win effect can be executed.

When it is judged that it is not the ready-to-win effect period in step 60AKS046 (step 60AKS046; No), and after performing the control of step 60AKS047, it is judged whether or not it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048). The jackpot notification period may be predetermined in the production control pattern (such as the special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined at step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The big hit notification period may be set in advance so as to be after the ready-to-win effect period. When it is determined that it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048; Yes), control is performed to execute a jackpot notification effect (step 60AKS049). By the control of step 60AKS049, it becomes possible to notify that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state in a predetermined period during execution of the variable display.

When it is determined that it is not the jackpot notification period at step 60AKS048 (step 60AKS048; No), and after performing the control at step 60AKS049, it is determined whether or not it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050). The value notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The value notification effect period may be set so as to be later than the jackpot notification period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the jackpot notification period. When it is determined that it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; Yes), control is performed to execute the value notification effect (step 60AKS051). By the control of step 60AKS051, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the value notification effect.

If it is determined at step 60AKS050 that it is not the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS051, it is determined whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052). The setting suggestion effect period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern during the big hit. The setting suggestion effect period should be set so as to be later than the value notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; Yes), control is performed to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 60AKS053). By the control of step 60AKS053, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. If it is determined in step 60AKS052 that it is not the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; No), after performing the control in step 60AKS053, for example, in the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on this, control is performed to execute effects during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative symbols (step 60AKS054), and then the process for effects during variable display is terminated.

When it is determined at step 60AKS041 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 60AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step 60AKS055). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not received (step 60AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the pattern confirmation command is received (step 60AKS055; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, which results in a variable display of the decorative pattern. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) is performed (step 60AKS056). Subsequently, a predetermined time is set as a wait time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step 60AKS057). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step 60AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 32-9 shows execution periods and execution timings of various effects with respect to the characteristic portion 60AK. Among them, FIG. 32-9(A) shows the execution period and execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of variable display of decorative patterns. FIG. 32-9(B) shows execution periods and execution timings of operation-related effects including number-of-times notification effects and operation effects. When the variable display is started at timing T0, it becomes a number-of-times notification effect period. During the number-of-times notification effect period, the number-of-times notification effect is executed by the control in step 60AKS043 of the effect processing during variable display.

After that, when the number-of-times notification effect period ends at timing T1, it becomes a notice effect period. During the notice effect period, the operation effect, which is the notice effect, can be executed by the control in step 60AKS045 of the effect processing during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of advance notice effects is executed, each time advance notice effect included in the multiple advance notice effects, such as the first notice, the second notice, etc., is executed in order. . The notice effect period is not only the period in which the pre-reach variation is performed before the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, but also the post-reach variation after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-reach mode. part of the period may be included. By executing the operation effect as the notice effect during the notice effect period, the display result of the variable display is changed to "big hit" based on the detection of the action of the player such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example. It becomes possible to execute a performance that foretells what will happen.

In the variable display of the decorative symbols, for example, when the determined decorative symbols of the big winning combination are stopped and displayed, the big winning notification is executed at timing T2. In the effect process during variable display, when it is determined in step 60AKS048 that it is the jackpot notification period, the control in step 60AKS049 enables execution of the jackpot notification effect. At this time, it becomes a value notification performance period. During the value notification effect period, the control in step 60AKS051 of the variable display effect process enables execution of the operation effect as the value notification effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a value notification effect is executed multiple times, each value notification effect included in the value notification effect of multiple times, such as the first notification, the second notification, etc., is executed in order. executed. By executing the operation performance as the value reporting performance during the value reporting performance period, based on detection of the action of the player, such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the probability variable state is set. It becomes possible to execute an effect for informing whether or not to be controlled.

Subsequently, special time notification is executed at timing T3, and the setting suggestion effect period begins. During the setting suggesting effect period, the control in step 60AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display makes it possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed multiple times, each setting suggestion effect included in the setting suggestion effect such as the first suggestion, the second suggestion, and so on is sequentially performed. executed. By executing the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion effect period, based on the detection of the player's action such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 It becomes possible to execute a production that makes a suggestion. After that, when the timing T4 is reached, the variable display ends and the big win starts, and the control of the big win game state is started.

In this way, when operation effects are executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide a number-of-times notification effect period, an advance notice effect period, a value notification effect period, and a setting suggestion effect period. In the number-of-times notification effect period, a number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of executions of the operation effect is executed. During the notice performance period, an operation performance serving as a notice performance for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed. During the value notification effect period, an operation effect is executed as a value notification effect for informing whether or not the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In the setting suggestion effect period, an operation effect as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed. When the number of times of value notification is 0, the value notification effect period may not be provided, and when the number of times of setting suggestion is 0, the setting suggestion effect period may not be provided.

The advance notice effect period and the value notification effect period are included in the predetermined period during which the operation effect can be executed. The setting suggestion effect period is included in the specific period during which the operation effect can be executed after the predetermined period has elapsed. The value notification effect period is started when the big hit notification is performed at timing T2. The big-hit notification by the big-hit notification performance makes it possible to notify that it is controlled to the big-hit game state in a predetermined period. The setting suggestive effect can be executed as an operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period when the big win is reported at the timing T2.

In step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the set suggestion frequency is determined to be other than 0 at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", and the setting suggestion effect is performed. Feasibly determined. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change", the jackpot type is controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, A predetermined period elapses at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with the low advantage is performed when the notification of the control to the jackpot game state with the high advantage is performed by the value notification performance. In a later specific period, it becomes possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode.

Even when an operation performance such as a notice performance or a value notification performance is made executable in a prescribed period, it is difficult to raise a player's expectation after the prescribed period elapses when these operation performances are terminated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, it is possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. As expected from the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode, the performance can be diversified and the game interest can be improved.

Further, in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, only when the jackpot type is "probability variable", the setting suggestion number is determined to be other than 0, and the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executable. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, according to being controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with the highest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change". Only when the value notification performance is controlled to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage, the setting suggestion performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. Become.

In general, it is difficult to further raise the player's expectation after the notification that the game is controlled to a high-advantage jackpot game state. On the other hand, the present invention makes it possible to execute the setting suggestion effect as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period, and provides a case where the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested. , even after the lapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to diversify the performance and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode.

FIGS. 32-10 and 32-11 show examples of execution of operation effects. In this execution example, the number of executions of the operation presentation is determined to be 10 times, that is, "executed 10 times", and the number of times of value notification and the number of setting suggestions are both determined to be 2. Therefore, after the operation performance as the notice performance is executed six times, the notice performance period ends and the big win is announced. FIG. 32-10(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD1 when the big win notification is executed by the big win notification effect. At this time, a big hit notification effect including display of a message such as "battle win!" and display of a effect image showing a character is executed. In addition, a normal pattern representing the number "6" is displayed as a decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. As the remaining number of executions of the operation effect, an effect image indicating "remaining number of operations: 4" is also displayed. When the decoration pattern of the non-probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbols is displayed, the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "non-probability variable", giving the impression that it is not controlled to the probability variable state. , given to the player.

FIG. 32-10(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD2 when the value notification effect period is started. At this time, a message indicating 4, which is the remaining number of operation effects, is displayed as the executable number of the operation effects as the value notification effect. FIG. 32-10(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD3 when the first value notification effect is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 32-10(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD4 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the big hit type is "probability variable" is not notified, so that the probability variable state after the end of the big hit game state A failure notification effect that gives an impression of being uncontrolled is executed. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 3” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 32-10(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD5 when the second value notification effect is started. At this time, similarly to the case where the first value notification effect is started, an effect image showing the push button 31B is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. FIG. 32-10(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD6 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the jackpot type is "variable probability" is performed, so that the variable probability state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. A success notification effect for notifying that it is controlled is executed. In addition, as decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the normal design that indicates the number "6" is a probability variation design that indicates the number "7". changed and displayed. When the decoration pattern of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variable symbols is displayed, the big win type is controlled to the big win game state corresponding to "variable probability", and the player is informed that it is controlled to the variable probability state. becomes recognizable. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 2” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 32-10(G) shows an effect execution example 60AKD7 when the setting suggestion effect period is started. At this time, along with notification of the special time, a message is displayed that notifies 2, which is the remaining number of operation effects, as the number of executable times of the operation effects as setting suggestion effects.

FIG. 32-11(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD8 when the first setting suggestion effect is started. In this case, by displaying the effect image corresponding to the setting suggesting effect and the effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 32-11(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD9 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH2, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2. By displaying the characters CH1 to CH5 corresponding to the suggested setting patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 in order on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the advantage corresponding to the character indicated by the displayed effect image can be displayed. , are recognizable by the player.

FIG. 32-11(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD10 when the second setting suggestion effect is started. At this time, as in the case where the first setting suggestion effect is started, the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect and the effect image showing the push button 31B are displayed, and the player can press the push button 31B. action is prompted. FIG. 32-11(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD11 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH4, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4. FIG. 32-11(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD12 when the setting suggestion effect period ends. At this time, the display result of the corresponding character in the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed may be displayed so that the player can recognize it. FIG. 32-11(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD13 in the case of stop-displaying the decorative symbols of the probability variable big hit combination which becomes the fixed decorative symbols corresponding to the end of the variable display. After that, based on the display result of the variable display being "big hit", the control of the big win game state is started.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, instead of the decision example shown in FIG. 32-4, for example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "probable variation", setting suggestion production may be determined feasibly. In the determination example shown in FIG. 32-4, the setting suggestion number may be determined by the ratio of the case where the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" are interchanged. In this way, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", if the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than "probability variation", the jackpot type is less advantageous than the case of "probability variation" In the case of a certain "non-probability variable", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big hit game state. In addition, only in the case of "non-probability variation", which is the jackpot type with the lowest degree of advantage among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the operation performance that becomes the setting suggestion performance may be made executable. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

As a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage, instead of the jackpot game state in which the jackpot type is "non-probability variable" or "probability variable", it may be possible to control the jackpot game state in which the number of rounds is different. For example, "4R" with 4 rounds, "6R" with 6 rounds, "8R" with 8 rounds, and "10R" with 10 rounds. may be provided. In this case, as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire increases, so the player's advantage should be increased. The value notification effect may be a effect of notifying the player of the number of prize balls that the player can acquire according to the number of rounds. Also in such a case, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage, there is a notification that is controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage by a value notification effect. When it is performed, the setting suggestive effect is set as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with a low advantage is performed. Make it executable. In addition, in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to inform that the jackpot game state is controlled to the highest degree of advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

On the other hand, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to inform the player that the jackpot game state is controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage. In this case, the set suggestive performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage is performed. may Alternatively, in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to control to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

In addition, the player's advantage in a plurality of kinds of advantageous states may be varied according to whether or not any game value is awarded and the contents of the game value to be awarded. For example, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state. Alternatively, when the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the jackpot probability in the variable probability state. The player's advantage may be varied by varying the number of consecutive wins, which is the number of times the game is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, the value that can be imparted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the game value related to the execution of the game itself. It may include part or all of executing a specific effect, such as playing a sound or displaying an image showing a two-dimensional code. The image indicating the two-dimensional code may include information that enables acquisition of predetermined digital content by photographing with a terminal device (portable terminal) possessed by the player. Values that can be imparted in the pachinko game machine 1 may include performance points different from those for executing a specific performance.

The number of executions of the operation effect is not limited to the case of "executed 5 times", which is 5 times, or the case of "executed 10 times", which is 10 times. It is acceptable if it can be set. Also in this case, when the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is large, the number of times of setting suggestion may be set to other than 0 at a higher rate than when the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is small so that the setting suggestion presentation can be executed. In addition, when the number of times of execution of operation effects is large, it is possible to set the setting suggestion number of times that is not determined when the number of times of execution of operation effects is small, or to increase the ratio of executing more setting suggestion effects. may

Instead of the decision example shown in FIG. 32-6, for all of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns, a restriction may be provided so that the setting suggestion rendering by the same setting suggestion pattern is not executed. In addition, regardless of whether or not it is the final operation effect, and whether or not the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined, the setting suggestion pattern is determined at the common determination ratio, and then the predetermined difference is determined. When the replacement condition is established, the determined setting suggestion pattern may be replaced with another setting suggestion pattern, thereby restricting the execution of the setting suggestion performance based on the same setting suggestion pattern. Alternatively, a setting suggestion effect based on the same setting suggestion pattern may be repetitively executed for a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.

The setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be determined at different ratios depending on, for example, the number of setting suggestions, not only whether or not it is the final operation presentation. When the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the determination of the set value of 6 may be made easier to execute. Alternatively, when the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a lower rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and it may be difficult to perform the confirmation notification that the setting value is 6. .

A setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern until a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied after being executed once. . For example, in a period in which the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, the cancellation condition is not established, and after the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed once, the same setting suggestion pattern is executed. It may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by . When the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed, it is confirmed that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and it becomes possible to recognize that the set value has a high advantage for the player. , it is possible to increase the rarity of such a setting suggestion effect and improve the game interest.

Instead of the setting suggesting effect, or when an operation effect serving as a notice effect is executed together with the setting suggesting effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested. For example, as the plurality of notice effect patterns, there are notice effect patterns with different decision ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko game machine 1, and notice effect patterns that can be determined only when the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 are specific values. may be provided. More specifically, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it is possible to decide on a notice performance pattern that notifies a message of "reliability 66%", or the decision ratio of the notice performance pattern is increased. Thus, it is sufficient that the determined values in the announcement effect pattern determination table are assigned to a plurality of announcement effect patterns. By executing the operation performance as the advance notice performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the advance notice performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. becomes. In addition to the operation effect that is the advance notice effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested when the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed. By executing the operation performance as the value notification performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the value notification performance is performed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. becomes executable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the operation performances for giving advance notice and information, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the operation effect determination process shown in FIG. 32-2, instead of steps 60AKS025 to 60AKS029, the number of times of value notification may be determined and then the number of setting suggestions may be determined. In this case, when the number of times of value notification is determined to be other than 0, the number of times of setting suggestion can be determined, and when the number of times of value notification is determined to be 0, the number of times of setting suggestion is not determined, and a setting suggestion effect is produced. may not be executed. In this way, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, it is only necessary to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect.

The setting suggesting effect is not limited to an effect suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be an effect suggesting whether or not the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed, for example. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include setting suggestion patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the setting suggestion performance is executed by the setting suggestion pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed. , the performance can be diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved.

At least part of the predetermined period or part or all of the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, the operation effect as the advance notice effect is executed, and the operation effect as the value notification effect and the setting suggesting effect may not be executed. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the value notification production is performed along with the execution of the big hit start production (fanfare production) and the production during the big hit (production corresponding to the first and second rounds, etc.) Alternatively, an operation effect that serves as a setting suggesting effect may be made executable. The operation effects such as the advance notice effect, the value notification effect, and the setting suggestion effect may be executable in any order. A case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed without executing the value notification effect.

In addition to the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the operation effect may be executed based on detection of a tilting operation on the stick controller 31A. When the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is executed, the effect mode in which the player's advantage is high at a higher rate than when the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed. good. For example, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is such that the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the push button 31B is 0/100 and the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is 100/100. A determined value in the pattern determination table may be assigned to multiple setting suggestion patterns.

The configuration for detecting the action of the player is not limited to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. may be possible. Further, a sensor capable of detecting any action other than the action of inputting an instruction by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. A predetermined camera may be used to analyze the result of photographing an object such as a player's hand (video motion capture), and an arbitrary action may be detected as a predetermined operation. That is, the configuration for detecting the action of the player may be any configuration that can detect the action of any object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or action execution different. It is acceptable as long as the contents are different (for example, whether to stop or reduce, the degree of reduction, etc.).

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that is advantageous to the player, for example, can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, and a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, from 1 to 6. setting means such as the CPU 103 for executing the setting value change process of FIG. Based on the detection of the action of the player, for example, the process of steps 60AKS045, 60AKS051, 60AKS053 shown in FIG. An action effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 performs notification corresponding to the number of executions of the action effect, for example, the process of step 60AKS043 shown in FIG. 32-8 can be executed. In the execution pattern of the action effect by the action effect executing means, the action effect of the number of times indicated in the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period, for example, variable display A first execution pattern such as when the result is not a "jackpot" or when the set suggestion number of times is determined to be 0, and an action performance with a smaller number of execution times than indicated in the notification performance are executed within a predetermined period. , and a second execution pattern in which, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the action rendering of the remaining number of executions is executed, for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot" and the set suggestion number determination result is other than 0. 32-5, 32-6, and 32-9, for example, the action effect execution means selects the action effect to be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period of time in a suggestive effect mode for suggesting the setting of the setting means. It is viable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

Advantageous notification means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 60AKS049 shown in FIG. When the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in the processing of step 60AKS024 shown in 32-2, when the notification by the advantageous notification means such as the part that executes the processing of step 60AKS025 is performed, a predetermined period of time In a specific period after the elapse, it may be possible to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to draw attention to the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. 32-4, for example, when the advantageous notification means notifies that the second advantageous state is controlled. may be able to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in the specific period at a higher rate than when the advantageous notification means reports that the control to the first advantageous state is performed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. It is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states including, and the operation effect execution means is, for example, when the jackpot types shown in FIG. When the notification of being controlled to the first advantageous state by the advantageous notification means is made, the suggestion is made in a specific period at a higher rate than when the notification of being controlled to the second advantageous state by the advantageous notification means It may be possible to execute the action rendering of the rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As the advantageous state, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states, such as different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, the type of jackpot is either ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation''. For example, as shown in FIG. 32-4, it is possible to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in a specific period only when the advantageous notification means reports that control is to be made to the advantageous state with the highest degree of advantage. may As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

The action effect executing means, for example, when the set suggestion number of times shown in FIG. , which can be executed a plurality of times in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period, and restricts execution of the same mode in which the action rendering of the suggestive mode is included in the plurality of modes, for example, step 60AKS027 shown in FIG. 32-2. Limiting means such as the effect control CPU 120 that determines the setting suggestion pattern at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 32-6 in the process of . As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

The action effect execution means performs the action effect of the suggestion effect mode at a first timing such as the execution timing of the first suggestion, for example, and a second suggestion later than the first timing, for example, in a specific period after the elapse of the predetermined period. 32-4 and 32-6, for example, as shown in FIG. 32-4 and FIG. may be executed at a higher rate at the second timing than at the first timing. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to draw attention to the action effects of the suggestive effect mode.

The action effect executing means may be capable of executing, in a predetermined period of time, an action effect that gives an advance notice of being controlled in an advantageous state in a suggestive effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the motion performances for giving advance notice, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 33-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characterizing portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 33-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a production data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main substrate 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorations. It may be an integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of the production using some or all of the plurality of production devices, such as the LED for the display and the movable members for production such as the movable body 32, is integrated on one chip. . In addition, the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132 and a built-in memory 91AK136. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in accordance with the request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, there is character image data, which is sprite image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It would be nice if it was prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. It is good if there is. As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The performance data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which progress of performance is controlled.

ROM91AK124 memorize|stores a computer program, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. RAM91AK125 provides a work area to CPU91AK131 of microprocessor 91AK100 for production control. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of an internal register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, it becomes a time elapsing signal. generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM91AK124, the CPU91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 comprises a plurality of determination tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a determination table, and various performance control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer judgment value, end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a command group describing a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK 132 according to the order of image processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the presentation using such a display list, it is sufficient to control the electrical components for presentation in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used to control electrical parts for presentation. CPU91AK131 should just be able to read the program and data stored in RAM91AK125 in read-out time shorter than the read-out time of the program and data stored in ROM91AK124.

CPU91AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124 . The production control process includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM91AK124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various variation data read processing for reading variation data, reception processing for CPU 91AK 131 to accept input of various signals from the outside, transmission processing for CPU 91 AK 131 to output various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing good too.

The VDP 91AK 132 determines the content of image display control in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction portion (instruction code) included in the display control instruction from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, a display control instruction group included in the decoded result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command group for voice control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, separates the data into video data and audio data, and outputs the data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. may The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the character image designated by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132 . The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (grayscale control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided within VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from VRAM 91AK147, such as internal memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data). The frame buffer stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, for example, and display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. Thus, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V-blank occurs. A V-blank occurs at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image-drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time that the drawing process is performed, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates audio signals that enable audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Also, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the like, for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 33-2 shows a configuration example corresponding to the storage contents for the storage area for effect control. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data relating to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data relating to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores a performance control program and performance control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for performance control. For example, the CPU 91AK 131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK 100 performs various judgments, decisions, and settings. Table data, which are configuration data of various tables, pattern data constituting production control patterns, etc., are stored in a storage area as management data. It may be stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores a display control program and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100 to perform various image processing, a display process table defining the procedure for displaying the performance image, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. It is good if there is. The image processing program may include a program for converting vector format image data into bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program for generating a bitmap-format text image based on text described using character codes and font data.

Storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and related data. For moving image data, image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by compression encoding such as motion-compensated predictive encoding using images of multiple frames that serve as original images, and multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files forming a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of moving images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is the mode and form of reproducing and displaying the moving image, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. Table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be static image data in which any character image representing a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns, persons, graphics, symbols, etc. is described in vector or bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files forming a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that table data and data files forming the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted to the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the outline for each character used to display the text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying parameters for straight lines and curves for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, and arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, phrases, words, or a combination of some or all of these. Any unit can be used as long as the unit is recognizable. Also, the text image data may indicate a text image with only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, and so on. It may indicate a decorative character. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when VDP 91AK 132 executes the image processing program, so it may be stored in either ROM 91AK 124 or built-in memory 91AK 136 . Thus, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the performance data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124 or the internal memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as effect data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files forming the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM14 stores audio related data including audio data and related data. The sound data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the sound reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the presentation of moving image display, and can reproduce and output any sound as the presentation in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Anything that does. The audio-related data stored in storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The sound output process table is used for sound control processing that can change sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as effect control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. Thus, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 33-3 shows an example of determining moving image data and a text display process table according to ready-to-win effects. In super reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, effects by moving image display using moving image data and effects by text image display using text image data can be executed. The period during which the animation display effect is executed and the period during which the text image display effect is executed may be partially or wholly the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 33-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11 and 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is determined according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. be done. Among them, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach-to-win A (big win)", moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the content of ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, the text display process table may or may not be determined in common for different ready-to-win effect contents. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach A (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach B (losing)", it is impossible to decide. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach A (losing)", it is impossible to decide. Thus, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. Displayable. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", a moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach-to-win B (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Displayable. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 33-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 33-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in correspondence with the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used corresponding to the effect. FIG. 33-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include one in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a single text display period. The text display period designates the start time to start displaying and the end time to end the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image in the reach effect, or specified using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. may However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time of the text display period will be calculated using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. should be specified. Since the elapsed time after the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, etc., can be used even in the common ready-to-reach effect. may start to appear at different times. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information designates the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be information that designates the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses arbitrary character codes such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), and JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.) to specify the contents of the text image to be displayed. may be information specifying the The text display setting information is information that designates the display mode of the text image to be settable based on display style information, display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set by using arbitrary table data so that the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period.

FIG. 33-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 33-5(A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 33-5(A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 33-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the SP reach B reach effect is executed, at timing T10. The display of moving images is started at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 33-4(A1), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, as shown in FIG. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. display. Timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Note that the timing T08 is a timing that comes after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 33-4(A2), as shown in FIG. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. display. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

In this manner, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly common to the second text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, part of the first text display period is shared with the second text display period, and part of the other period is shared with the third text display period. Thus, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is in common with the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is in common with the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. Thus, the first text display period may be partially included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be partially included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may be entirely included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be entirely included in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images designated by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text A text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, of the first text display period, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed with the text image designation information The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is set so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image is displayed. The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods. Components can be changed. It should be noted that when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image as the display mode may be changed in all of the plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. good. When moving images using common moving image data are displayed, part or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for a plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. You can let In this way, part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image may be changed, or part or all of the text image added to one moving image may be changed. may be

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 33-4(B), during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, as shown in FIG. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. display. Timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After the timing T15 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

FIG. 33-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size that is the size for displaying the text image. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorations to be added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 33-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 33-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 33-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 33-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but not included in text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. Thereby, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in displaying the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in a display style or display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the third text display period included in the first text display period is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text display setting information 91AKB03 is displayed in the display style or display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. or display layout. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image designated by the designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image designation is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image designated by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and when the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style or display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. can be displayed in the display style and display layout set by In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting information, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by the information 91AKB13. In this way, during the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. 1 display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. Along with the display, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some of the text images can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the other text images. Further, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed, such that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 33-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 33-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image The text image designated by the designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. display. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this manner, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this manner, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least part of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with a plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 33-6(A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 33-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. A text image is displayed in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 33-4(B), the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, may be changeable according to the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at a different rate depending on whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, such as whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or one of a plurality of display colors may be determined. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK 131 even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP 91AK 132 should be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed only by changing a part of the data related to the text image contained in the text display process table. , it is possible to display various text images. If the display color of the text image is changed, other display styles may be correspondingly changeable. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image becomes easy for the player to visually recognize, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image becomes difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to As a result, it is possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's sense of incongruity in displaying the text image.

FIG. 33-7 shows an execution example of rendering in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, text images corresponding to a plurality of text display periods are displayed along with the moving image display when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. In the reach performance of the SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", a moving image is displayed. Moving image display using data 91AKD11 is performed. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a common battle effect display is performed in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight each other. It is sufficient that the content of the effect display is common until the timing of notification. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is increased, and when the display result of the variable display is "loss", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is increased. becomes higher. Therefore, in the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach A, the degree of expectation for big wins can be varied according to the display contents of the text image according to the text display process table even during the moving image display period with the contents of the common performance display. can be done.

The effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 33-7(A) is the effect content common to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (300, 30), The font family is AA_gothic, which is classified as a gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the display color of the text image changes gradually from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 executes image conversion processing for displaying the text image in a display mode including the display style and display layout designated by the text display designation information. good.

In the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 33-7(A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600). ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho typeface, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponding to the normal character thickness, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , normal typeface corresponding to normal for the character style, left-aligned character alignment, and no character decoration.

Effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 33-7(B1) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600) and the font family is CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal typeface, character placement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has the same font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, character styles, and character placement have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

Effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 33-7 (B2) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Gekiatsu" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (250,600) and the font family of DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the display color of the text image is gold corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal body corresponding to normal, the character placement is in the center, and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and has font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Character styles, character alignments, and character decorations have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information are individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, if one data is changed and displayed, the first data and the Other pre-associated data may also be changeable and displayable. For example, if the display color of the text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration should be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold.

The display color of the text image and the background display color are, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), luminance (gradation) of any one of "0" to "255". The level can be set in 256 stages. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field have the same data format as the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying character images, for example. It is good if there is. The coordinates of the origin for displaying the text image can be set by combining the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a data format common to that of the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common to the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using common information with the effect image that is different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

A font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. The field data forming the fontSize field in the text display setting information corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is unique and different from the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in the effect image that is different from the text image. good too. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, and display various text images.

For example, when gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, by setting effect_gold in the textDecoration field, a glossy text image is displayed and gold is displayed around the text image. It is possible to add and display an effect image for In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 33-7(B2), when the text image designation information 91A13 designates a specific text image showing the line "Super hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., the specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with glossiness, and the effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to enhance the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when an effect by moving image display using moving image data is executed, by adding an effect by text image display using text image data, the player can easily recognize the contents of the effect. This makes it easy to provide information that is different from the contents of the presentation. In this case, in a data structure in which text image data is compression-encoded and multiplexed as video data included in moving image data, in text image display using text image data reproduced by decompression and decoding, contours There is a possibility that problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. In addition, if different moving image data are prepared according to the display contents of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data capacity of the moving image data tends to increase, and the image data processing load also increases. easier. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent the display quality from deteriorating in text image display, the image data processing load may increase further.

In the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, when an effect by moving image display using the moving image data read out from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, an effect by text image display using the text image data read out from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the player can easily recognize the contents of the presentation. In addition, since text image display effects using text image data stored separately from moving image data are added, an increase in the data volume of moving image data and an increase in the processing load of image data are avoided. , it is possible to control the appropriate display that can be prevented as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information designates the display content of the text image corresponding to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK 146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for the purpose. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed according to the elapsed time. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to one moving image, it is possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and at the same time reduce data capacity and processing load. Appropriate display control is enabled so that growth is prevented.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD01 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is executed when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data relating to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, for a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding text images using common data to multiple moving images and displaying them, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, while preventing increases in data volume and processing load. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the words "hot" are displayed according to the text image designation information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style or the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . A text image showing the line "Super hot" is a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is likely to be a "big hit". Any text image is acceptable. Thus, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode of the specific text image may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 33-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of the text image showing the words "hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, of the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is displayed in black. During the display period, the display color is gold and character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display. As for the display style of the text image that is common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is DD_mincho in the fontFamily field and the font size is 72px in the fontSize field. is set.

FIG. 33-8(A) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 33-8(B) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the words "hot" is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display the text image with glossiness by, for example, gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

FIG. 33-8(C) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to the text decoration effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the display color of the text image showing the line "Super hot" is gold and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the text image It is possible to display an effect image around the text image by using the display color of , shading, border display by beveling or embossing, a layer style that adds glow, or a combination of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, the effect image is added around the text image and displayed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the gold display, thereby improving the game performance with respect to the display of the text image. It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image specification information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image "character" out of the text information indicating the line "if this character wins..." to a different display color and background display of the text image from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and character style.

FIG. 33-9 shows a display example in which a portion of the text image is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions. In this display example, part of the text image "character" is displayed in white, the background color is black, and the character style is italic, while the other part of the text image is displayed in black. It is displayed so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image "character". Set the italic corresponding to the character style italic by the fontStyle field respectively. Also, the text display setting information 91AKB02 has black corresponding to #000000 as the display color of the text image by the color field, white corresponding to #FFFFFF as the background display color, and white corresponding to #FFFFFF by the fontStyle field. Set the normal type corresponding to the character style normal, respectively. Thus, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of the other portions, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the display of a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a portion displayed in a display style different from that of other portions may be changeable according to the progress of presentation by moving image display. For example, when a piece of music or dialogue is played back along with a moving image, a portion of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. You may let It may be possible to change the display style so that a part of the text image is faded-in or faded-out according to the progress of the music performance or speech reproduction. A portion of the text image displayed in a display style different from that of other portions is changed according to the elapsed time during the execution of an arbitrary effect, not limited to situations in which the music is played or the voice of dialogue is played along with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, a part displayed in a display style different from that of the other parts is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are set to the elapsed time, etc. Execute one of the following: display control to enable change according to the situation, or display control to enable display by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images. It may be one that does not execute the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be able to change arbitrary components, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. Instead of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any component related to the display of the text image can be changed. may For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement ratio and reduction ratio when displaying an enlarged or reduced text image, these enlargement ratios and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time It is only necessary to be able to change arbitrary components that can be set for the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio or the reduction ratio and the amount of change when the text image is changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to the common display contents, the display mode of the text image is changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 33-6(A). It is not limited to changing the display color, and any display mode such as display style or display layout may be changed. For example, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 can be displayed in the corresponding text display period instead of the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changeable to a display mode different from the display mode of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive, is multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display the text image in a particular manner, such as by decoding. In this case, the data regarding the text image of the specific mode is included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the text image related data includes the specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and the normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13. may

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. Alternatively, it may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 by the text image specifying information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read without using the font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize.

Scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only as data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to a text image that is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as word font data, may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display effects are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data will be facilitated, so designing effects for displaying text images. It is possible to reduce the burden, and to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As a second component related to the text image, the specific text image, which can change the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the line "Super hot" , any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, text images prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of music and text images prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of moving images may be used as specific text images. In this way, for specific text images corresponding to audio effects and display effects in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of music and the playback display of moving images, the second component such as the display mode is set in a plurality of ways. It may be changeable with timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be the specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to the text image of the display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is highly likely to be a "jackpot", but the text image of the display content that suggests that the rate of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be the specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10").

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image. may include a case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when a preset specific text image is displayed, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings such as the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be made so that it can be displayed with an effect image added around the text image. Just do it.

When a text image is displayed in a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as coordinates in characters and display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" in the color field in the text display setting information, by transitioning different display colors for each coordinate in the character of the text image. , rainbow display should be possible. For example, at the coordinates in the character 1, the display color is changed to red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue purple to red purple, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed. At this time, considering the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes darker, we adjusted the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display, and The display colors in the coordinates within the character may be changed in order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. After purplish-red, it is sufficient to return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the text image coordinates and display time range specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image. By sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates in the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow display. Alternatively, by sequentially changing the common display color for all in-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this manner, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether the player's specific action is detected, or the plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. Either can be changed. The player's specific action that enables the change of the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, or other operations of the V stick controller 31A. An arbitrary motion of tilting the rod or a motion of pressing the push button 31b may be used. Not limited to those that can detect player's actions, for example, based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target It may be possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects the state of the detection target. Any configuration that can be detected will suffice. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

Some or all of the text image display effects using the text image data may be executed as setting suggesting effects capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to the setting of such determination ratio, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the ratio at which the effect by text image display corresponding to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. are made different according to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is displayed. The ratio of execution of effects by image display increases. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", and the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectations, which are set values that are reasonable, increase.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this way, within a range in which the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this way, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limitation as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to setting suggesting effects, and arbitrary effects may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. Character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 are provided for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 33-7. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 33-8, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. good too. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple times. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 33-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. Character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 are provided for controlling display, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by the text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. , a character image using data relating to a common character image can be added and displayed. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 33-8, the character image control means, during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, displays the character image corresponding to the common first component. may be changeable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "hot", for example. For example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple times. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 33-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, and character images using common character image data for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image may be changed. It may be possible to add and display.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 5... Image display device 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 14... Backup memory board 100... Game control microcomputer 120... Effect control CPU
131 ... CPU
140 … VDP
150 to 156 ... Connectors 210A to 210D ... Backup data memory 91AK100 ... Production control microprocessor 91AK131 ... CPU
91AK132 … VDP
91AK143 ... Video decoder 91AK144 ... Video image renderer 91AK146 ... Text image renderer 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 ... Storage area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means for controlling display of a moving image using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area;
a control means;
and a storage means capable of storing backup data,
The control means is
capable of executing a first backup process of storing first backup data in the storage means based on the establishment of a first backup condition;
Based on the establishment of a second backup condition, a second backup process having a shorter execution time than the first backup process for storing the second backup data in the storage means can be executed with a priority different from that of the first backup process. and
It is possible to determine the mode of power-on,
the first backup condition is satisfied and the second backup condition is not satisfied in response to the power-on of the first mode,
the first backup condition and the second backup condition are satisfied in response to the power-on of the second aspect;
the data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component and a second component;
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image ,
Information indicated by the second backup data stored in the storage means is easier to confirm than information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images